366
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide Version: B/1 Code: MN000001806 FiberHome Telecommunication Technologies Co., Ltd. April 2015

AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

  • Upload
    others

  • View
    1

  • Download
    0

Embed Size (px)

Citation preview

Page 1: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

AN5006-20

Small-Sized Integrated AccessDevice

MSAN Configuration Guide

Version: B/1

Code: MN000001806

FiberHome Telecommunication Technologies Co., Ltd.

April 2015

Page 2: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device
Page 3: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

Thank you for choosing our products.

We appreciate your business. Your satisfaction is our goal.

We will provide you with comprehensive technical support

and after-sales service. Please contact your local sales

representative, service representative or distributor for any

help needed at the contact information shown below.

Fiberhome Telecommunication Technologies Co., Ltd.

Address: No. 67, Guanggu Chuangye Jie, Wuhan, Hubei, China

Zip code: 430073

Tel: +6 03 7960 0860/0884 (for Malaysia)

+91 98 9985 5448 (for South Asia)

+593 4 501 4529 (for South America)

Fax: +86 27 8717 8521

Website: http://www.fiberhomegroup.com

Page 4: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device
Page 5: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

Legal Notice

are trademarks of FiberHome Telecommunication Technologies Co., Ltd.

(Hereinafter referred to as FiberHome)

All brand names and product names used in this document are used for

identification purposes only and are trademarks or registered trademarks

of their respective holders.

All rights reserved

No part of this document (including the electronic version) may be

reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior

written permission from FiberHome.

Information in this document is subject to change without notice.

Page 6: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device
Page 7: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

Preface

Related Documentation

Document Description

AN5006-20 Small-Sized

Integrated Access Device

Product Description

Introduces the AN5006-20’s network location, functional

features, hardware structure, application model, equipment

configuration, network management system and technical

specifications.

AN5006-20 Small-Sized

Integrated Access Device

Hardware Description

Introduces the appearance, structure, functions, technical

specifications, and operation of the AN5006-20’s cabinet,

PDP, subrack, cards, cables and wires, so as to facilitate

users’ mastery of the hardware features of the equipment.

AN5006-20 Small-Sized

Integrated Access Device

Installation Guide

Introduces the overall installation and acceptance

inspection procedures from unpacking inspection to power-

on test after the AN5006-20 is delivered to the construction

site, and provides reference information (e.g. safety

principles and wiring scheme of a variety of interfaces) to

guide users to install the equipment.

AN5006-20 Small-Sized

Integrated Access Device Quick

Installation Guide

Introduces how to install the AN5006-20 and how to

connect and lay out wires and cables for it using

illustrations.

AN5006-20 Small-Sized

Integrated Access Device MSAN

Configuration Guide

Introduces the method for configuring the MSAN services

supported by the AN5006-20 via the UNM2000, such as

basic configuration, voice service configuration, data

service configuration, multicast service configuration, and

software upgrading configuration, to guide users on start-

up of various services and software upgrading.

I

Page 8: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

Document Description

AN5006-20 Small-Sized

Integrated Access Device EPON

Configuration Guide

Introduces the method for configuring the EPON services

supported by the AN5006-20 via the UNM2000, such as

basic configuration, voice service configuration, data

service configuration, multicast service configuration, and

software upgrading configuration, to guide users on start-

up of various services and software upgrading.

AN5006-20 Small-Sized

Integrated Access Device GPON

Configuration Guide

Introduces the method for configuring the GPON services

supported by the AN5006-20 via the UNM2000, such as

basic configuration, voice service configuration, data

service configuration, multicast service configuration, and

software upgrading configuration, to guide users on start-

up of various services and software upgrading.

II

Page 9: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

Version

Version Description

A Initial version

B

Corresponds to Version 3.1 of the AN5006-20.

The corresponding UNM2000 version is

V1.0R1 Build13.08.01.02.

Intended Readers

This manual is intended for the following readers:

u Planning and designing engineers

u Commissioning engineers

u Operation and maintenance engineers

To utilize this manual, these prerequisite skills are necessary:

u xDSL access principle

u Ethernet switching technology

u Computer network technology

u Internet Protocol

u V5 Protocol

u PON technology

III

Page 10: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

Conventions

Terminology Conventions

Terminology Convention

AN5006-20FiberHome AN5006-20 Small-sized Integrated Access

Device

UNM2000FiberHome UNM2000 Network Convergence Management

System

MCU-EPON Manage Control Card

MCU-GPON Manage Control Card

MCU-EPON2 Manage Control Card

MCU-GPON2 Manage Control Card

MCUA Manage Control Card

MCUB Manage Control Card

MCUC Manage Control Card

MCUD Manage Control Card

AD32 32 Lines ADSL2+ Card

AD64 64 Lines ADSL2+ Card

CASA 32 Ports ADSL2+ and POTS Combo Board

VD32 32 Lines VDSL Card

POTS32 32 Ports POTS Card

POTS 64 Ports POTS Card

HD32A 32-port SHDSL Interfacing Card

HDT8A High Bit Rate Digital TDM 8A Card

HDT8B High bit rate Digital TDM 8B

PWRB Power Card (Type B)

FANB Fan Unit

HCU-20 Environment monitoring device

IV

Page 11: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

Symbol Conventions

Symbol Convention Description

Note Important features or operation guide.

CautionPossible injury to persons or systems, or cause traffic

interruption or loss.

Warning May cause severe bodily injuries.

î Jump Jumps to another step.

íCascading

menuConnects multi-level menu options.

îBidirectional

serviceThe service signal is bidirectional.

íUnidirectional

serviceThe service signal is unidirectional.

V

Page 12: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device
Page 13: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

Contents

Preface...................................................................................................................I

Related Documentation ...................................................................................I

Version ..........................................................................................................III

Intended Readers ..........................................................................................III

Conventions ................................................................................................. IV

1 Configuring the UNM2000 Management Channel.........................................1-1

1.1 Logging into the Console ...............................................................1-2

1.1.1 First-time Login to the Console.........................................1-2

1.1.2 Subsequent Login to the Console.....................................1-5

1.2 Configuring the UNM2000 Management Channel...........................1-6

1.2.1 Configuration Rules .........................................................1-6

1.2.2 Network Diagram.............................................................1-7

1.2.3 Planning Data..................................................................1-8

1.2.4 Configuration Flow.........................................................1-12

1.2.5 Configuring the Management VLAN ...............................1-13

1.2.6 Adding Uplink Service VLAN..........................................1-13

1.2.7 Configuring the Static Routing........................................1-13

1.2.8 Configuration Result ......................................................1-14

1.3 Logging into the UNM2000...........................................................1-14

2 Adding Equipment .......................................................................................2-1

2.1 Configuration Rules .......................................................................2-2

2.2 Configuration Flow.........................................................................2-2

2.3 Creating the Logical Domain ..........................................................2-3

2.4 Creating the Access NE .................................................................2-5

2.5 Adding Cards.................................................................................2-7

2.5.1 Adding Cards Automatically .............................................2-7

2.5.2 Adding Cards Manually ....................................................2-9

2.6 Configuring the SNMP Trap Receiver Address .............................2-10

Page 14: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

2.7 Configuring the SNMP Time System ............................................2-11

2.8 Synchronizing Time .....................................................................2-12

2.9 Saving Current Configuration to Flash ..........................................2-13

3 Configuring Voice Services ..........................................................................3-1

3.1 Example of Configuring NGN Voice Service - H.248 .......................3-2

3.1.1 Configuration Rules .........................................................3-2

3.1.2 Network Diagram.............................................................3-2

3.1.3 Planning Data..................................................................3-3

3.1.4 Configuration Flow...........................................................3-8

3.1.5 Enabling the POTS Port...................................................3-9

3.1.6 Configuring the Uplink Service VLAN .............................3-11

3.1.7 Configuring the Voice VLAN...........................................3-12

3.1.8 Configuring Megaco / MGCP Softswitch Platform

Parameters....................................................................3-13

3.1.9 Configuring the Voice IPAddress ...................................3-13

3.1.10 Configuring Basic Voice Parameters ..............................3-14

3.1.11 Configuring the RTP Resource Profile ............................3-15

3.1.12 Configuring the Voice Port..............................................3-15

3.1.13 Configuration End ..........................................................3-16

3.1.14 Checking the Voice Equipment Status............................3-16

3.1.15 Viewing the Voice IPAddress Status ..............................3-17

3.1.16 Checking the DSP Channel Status.................................3-18

3.1.17 Checking the NGN User Port Status...............................3-19

3.2 Example of Configuring NGN Voice Service - SIP.........................3-20

3.2.1 Configuration Rules .......................................................3-20

3.2.2 Network Diagram...........................................................3-20

3.2.3 Planning Data................................................................3-21

3.2.4 Configuration Flow.........................................................3-27

3.2.5 Enabling the POTS Port.................................................3-28

3.2.6 Configuring the Uplink Service VLAN .............................3-30

3.2.7 Configuring the Voice VLAN...........................................3-31

3.2.8 Configuring the SIP Server.............................................3-32

3.2.9 Configuring the Voice IPAddress ...................................3-33

3.2.10 Configuring Basic Voice Parameters ..............................3-33

3.2.11 Configuring the SIP Digitmap .........................................3-34

3.2.12 Configuring the Voice Port..............................................3-35

Page 15: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

3.2.13 Configuration End ..........................................................3-36

3.2.14 Checking the Voice Equipment Status............................3-36

3.2.15 Viewing the Voice IPAddress Status ..............................3-37

3.2.16 Checking the DSP Channel Status.................................3-37

3.2.17 Checking the NGN User Port Status...............................3-38

3.3 Example of Configuring PSTN Voice Service................................3-39

3.3.1 Configuration Rule .........................................................3-40

3.3.2 Network Diagram...........................................................3-41

3.3.3 Planning Data................................................................3-42

3.3.4 Configuration Flow.........................................................3-46

3.3.5 Configuring the PSTN Voice Service on the AN3300-C1.3-46

3.3.6 Configuring the PSTN Voice Service on the AN5006-20 .3-52

3.3.7 Configuration Result ......................................................3-57

3.4 Common Configuration ................................................................3-59

3.4.1 Configuring POTS Common Parameters........................3-59

3.4.2 Configuring the Voice Timer ...........................................3-60

3.4.3 Configuring the DSP Profile ...........................................3-60

3.4.4 Configuring Fax Parameters ..........................................3-61

3.4.5 Configuring the POS Telephone Number........................3-62

3.4.6 Configuring the IPT Number...........................................3-62

3.4.7 Configuring the Timeout Duration of the Signal Tone.......3-63

3.4.8 2833 Configuration ........................................................3-64

3.5 MEGACO / MGCP Configuration..................................................3-64

3.5.1 Configuring Voice MD5 Authentication ...........................3-65

3.5.2 Configuring the Howler Tone Timeout Processing

Parameters....................................................................3-65

3.5.3 Configuring the Caller ID Display Mode ..........................3-66

3.6 SIP Configuration.........................................................................3-67

3.6.1 SIPAdvanced Configuration ..........................................3-67

3.6.2 Configuring the SIP User Call Profile ..............................3-68

3.7 Registering / Unregistering the MGC ............................................3-68

3.8 Registering / Unregistering the NGN User ....................................3-69

3.9 Viewing the Voice Statistics Information .......................................3-70

3.9.1 Viewing the Statistics Information of Signaling Packet ....3-70

3.9.2 Viewing the Call Statistics Information ............................3-70

Page 16: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

3.9.3 Viewing the Statistics Information of Voice Stream Port...3-71

3.9.4 Viewing the Port Call Statistics Information.....................3-72

4 Configuring Data Services ...........................................................................4-1

4.1 Example of Configuring ADSL Data Services in the Transparent

Mode.............................................................................................4-2

4.1.1 Configuration Rules .........................................................4-2

4.1.2 Network Diagram.............................................................4-2

4.1.3 Planning Data..................................................................4-3

4.1.4 Configuration Flow.........................................................4-10

4.1.5 Configuring the Uplink Service VLAN .............................4-12

4.1.6 Configuring the ADSL Line Profile ..................................4-12

4.1.7 Binding ADSL Ports to the ADSL Line Profile..................4-13

4.1.8 Configuring the Port Rate Limiting Profile .......................4-14

4.1.9 Binding ADSL Ports to the Rate Limiting Profile ..............4-15

4.1.10 Configuring the PVC Profile ...........................................4-16

4.1.11 Binding ADSL Ports to the PVC Profile ...........................4-17

4.1.12 Configuring the Port Service VLAN.................................4-19

4.1.13 Enabling the ADSL Port .................................................4-22

4.1.14 Enabling the Port PVC ...................................................4-24

4.1.15 Configuration Result ......................................................4-26

4.2 Example of Configuring ADSL Data Services in the Tag Mode ......4-26

4.2.1 Configuration Rules .......................................................4-26

4.2.2 Network Diagram...........................................................4-26

4.2.3 Planning Data................................................................4-27

4.2.4 Configuration Flow.........................................................4-33

4.2.5 Configuring the Uplink Service VLAN .............................4-35

4.2.6 Configuring the ADSL Line Profile ..................................4-35

4.2.7 Binding ADSL Ports to the ADSL Line Profile..................4-36

4.2.8 Configuring the PVC Profile ...........................................4-37

4.2.9 Binding ADSL Ports to the PVC Profile ...........................4-38

4.2.10 Configuring the Port Rate Limiting Profile .......................4-40

4.2.11 Binding ADSL Ports to the Rate Limiting Profile ..............4-41

4.2.12 Configuring the Port Service VLAN.................................4-41

4.2.13 Enabling the ADSL Port .................................................4-45

4.2.14 Enabling the Port PVC ...................................................4-47

4.2.15 Configuration Result ......................................................4-48

Page 17: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

4.3 Example of Configuring the VDSL Data Service in the 1:1 Translation

Mode...........................................................................................4-48

4.3.1 Configuration Rules .......................................................4-48

4.3.2 Network Diagram...........................................................4-49

4.3.3 Planning Data................................................................4-50

4.3.4 Configuration Flow.........................................................4-56

4.3.5 Configuring the Uplink Service VLAN .............................4-58

4.3.6 Configuring the VDSL Line Basic Profile.........................4-58

4.3.7 Binding VDSL Ports to the VDSL Line Basic Profile ........4-59

4.3.8 Configuring the VDSL Service Profile .............................4-60

4.3.9 Binding VDSL Ports to the VDSL Service Profile.............4-61

4.3.10 Configuring the Port Rate Limiting Profile .......................4-62

4.3.11 Binding VDSL Ports to the Rate Limiting Profile ..............4-63

4.3.12 Configuring the Port Service VLAN.................................4-64

4.3.13 Enabling the VDSL Ports ...............................................4-67

4.3.14 Configuration Result ......................................................4-68

4.4 Example of Configuring the VDSL Data Service in the N:1 Translation

Mode...........................................................................................4-69

4.4.1 Configuration Rules .......................................................4-69

4.4.2 Network Diagram...........................................................4-70

4.4.3 Planning Data................................................................4-70

4.4.4 Configuration Flow.........................................................4-76

4.4.5 Configuring the Uplink Service VLAN .............................4-77

4.4.6 Configuring the VDSL Line Basic Profile.........................4-77

4.4.7 Binding VDSL Ports to the VDSL Line Basic Profile ........4-78

4.4.8 Configuring the VDSL Service Profile .............................4-79

4.4.9 Binding VDSL Ports to the VDSL Service Profile.............4-80

4.4.10 Configuring the Port Rate Limiting Profile .......................4-81

4.4.11 Binding VDSL Ports to the Rate Limiting Profile ..............4-82

4.4.12 Configuring the Port Service VLAN.................................4-83

4.4.13 Enabling the VDSL Ports ...............................................4-84

4.4.14 Configuration Result ......................................................4-85

5 Configuring the G.SHDSL Service................................................................5-1

5.1 Example of Configuring the G.SHDSL Service Based on ATM ........5-2

5.1.1 Configuration Rules .........................................................5-2

5.1.2 Network Diagram.............................................................5-2

Page 18: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

5.1.3 Planning Data..................................................................5-3

5.1.4 Configuration Flow...........................................................5-9

5.1.5 Configuring the Uplink Port Attributes .............................5-11

5.1.6 Enabling an SHDSL Port................................................5-11

5.1.7 Enabling the Port PVC ...................................................5-13

5.1.8 Configuring the Uplink Service VLAN .............................5-15

5.1.9 Configuring an SHDSL Line Profile.................................5-15

5.1.10 Binding SHDSL Ports to the SHDSL Line Profile.............5-16

5.1.11 Configuring the PVC Profile ...........................................5-18

5.1.12 Binding SHDSL Ports to the PVC Profile ........................5-18

5.1.13 Configuring the Port Rate Limiting Profile .......................5-20

5.1.14 Binding SHDSL Ports to the Rate Limiting Profile ...........5-21

5.1.15 Configuring Parameters of the SHDSL Port Bound

Group ............................................................................5-23

5.1.16 Configuring the Port Service VLAN.................................5-23

5.1.17 Configuration Result ......................................................5-27

5.2 Example of Configuring the G.SHDSL Service Based on TDM (Local

Mode)..........................................................................................5-27

5.2.1 Configuration Rules .......................................................5-27

5.2.2 Network Diagram...........................................................5-28

5.2.3 Planning Data................................................................5-29

5.2.4 Configuration Flow.........................................................5-30

5.2.5 Configuring E1 Data.......................................................5-31

5.2.6 Configuring Clock ..........................................................5-32

5.2.7 Enabling the SHDSL Port...............................................5-33

5.2.8 Configuring an SHDSL Line Profile.................................5-35

5.2.9 Binding SHDSL Ports to the SHDSL Line Profile.............5-35

5.2.10 Configuration Result ......................................................5-37

6 Configuring the Multicast Service .................................................................6-1

6.1 Example for Multicast Service Configuration of the ADSL Card in the

Proxy Mode ...................................................................................6-2

6.1.1 Configuration Rules .........................................................6-2

6.1.2 Network Diagram.............................................................6-2

6.1.3 Planning Data..................................................................6-3

6.1.4 Configuration Flow...........................................................6-6

6.1.5 Disabling the Uplink Port Multicast Packet Suppression....6-6

Page 19: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

6.1.6 Configuring the Uplink Service VLAN ...............................6-7

6.1.7 Configuring the Multicast Mode ........................................6-8

6.1.8 Configuring the Multicast Proxy IPAddress ......................6-9

6.1.9 Configuring Multicast Default VLAN..................................6-9

6.1.10 Configuring the Port Service VLAN.................................6-10

6.1.11 Enabling the ADSL Port .................................................6-14

6.1.12 Configuration Result ......................................................6-16

6.2 Example of Configuring the Multicast Service on the VDSL Card in the

Controllable Mode........................................................................6-19

6.2.1 Configuration Rules .......................................................6-19

6.2.2 Network Diagram...........................................................6-19

6.2.3 Planning Data................................................................6-20

6.2.4 Configuration Flow.........................................................6-24

6.2.5 Disabling the Uplink Port Multicast Packet Suppression..6-24

6.2.6 Configuring the Uplink Service VLAN .............................6-25

6.2.7 Configuring the Multicast Mode ......................................6-26

6.2.8 Configuring the Multicast Proxy IPAddress ....................6-27

6.2.9 Configuring the Default Multicast VLAN..........................6-27

6.2.10 Configuring the Multicast Profile .....................................6-28

6.2.11 Configuring Multicast Group Parameters ........................6-29

6.2.12 Configuring Multicast Port Parameters ...........................6-30

6.2.13 Configuring the Port Service VLAN.................................6-31

6.2.14 Enabling the VDSL Ports ...............................................6-34

6.2.15 Configuration Result ......................................................6-35

7 Card Software Upgrade ...............................................................................7-1

7.1 Precautions ...................................................................................7-2

7.2 Upgrading the Management Control Card ......................................7-2

7.2.1 Upgrade Rules.................................................................7-2

7.2.2 Planning Data..................................................................7-2

7.2.3 Upgrade Flow ..................................................................7-4

7.2.4 Saving Current Configuration to Flash ..............................7-4

7.2.5 Backing up the Current Configuration File.........................7-5

7.2.6 Backing up the System Software......................................7-6

7.2.7 Upgrading the Management Control Card Software..........7-6

7.2.8 Resetting the Management Control Card..........................7-7

Page 20: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

7.2.9 Checking the Software Version of the Management Control

Card ................................................................................7-7

7.3 Upgrading the Line Card ................................................................7-8

7.3.1 Upgrade Rules.................................................................7-8

7.3.2 Planning Data..................................................................7-9

7.3.3 Upgrade Flow ..................................................................7-9

7.3.4 Upgrading the ADSL Interface Card Software.................7-10

7.3.5 Resetting the ADSL Interface Card.................................7-11

7.3.6 Checking the Software Version of the ADSL Interface

Card ..............................................................................7-11

7.4 Upgrading the Uplink Subcard of the MCUA Card.........................7-12

7.4.1 Upgrade Rule ................................................................7-12

7.4.2 Planning Data................................................................7-12

7.4.3 Upgrade Flow ................................................................7-12

7.4.4 Upgrading the Uplink Subcard of the MCUA Card...........7-13

7.4.5 Resetting the Uplink Subcard of the MCUA Card ............7-13

7.4.6 Viewing Software Version of the MCUA Card's Uplink

Subcard.........................................................................7-14

8 Configuring Link Aggregation .......................................................................8-1

8.1 Configuration Example of Manual Aggregation Mode......................8-2

8.1.1 Configuration Rules .........................................................8-2

8.1.2 Network Diagram.............................................................8-2

8.1.3 Planning Data..................................................................8-3

8.1.4 Configuration Flow...........................................................8-5

8.1.5 Configuring the Ethernet Port of the Management Control

Card ................................................................................8-5

8.1.6 Configuring the Aggregation Mode ...................................8-6

8.1.7 Configuring the Aggregation Ports....................................8-6

8.1.8 Configuration Result ........................................................8-7

8.2 Configuration Example of Static LACPAggregation Mode...............8-7

8.2.1 Configuration Rules .........................................................8-7

8.2.2 Network Diagram.............................................................8-8

8.2.3 Planning Data..................................................................8-9

8.2.4 Configuration Flow.........................................................8-10

Page 21: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

8.2.5 Configuring the Ethernet Port of the Management Control

Card ..............................................................................8-11

8.2.6 Configuring LACP Global Parameters ............................8-12

8.2.7 Configuring the LACP Port Parameters ..........................8-13

8.2.8 Configuring the Aggregation Mode .................................8-13

8.2.9 Configuring the Aggregation Ports..................................8-14

8.2.10 Configuration Result ......................................................8-15

9 Configuring the Power and Environment Monitoring......................................9-1

9.1 Configuring Environment Monitoring...............................................9-2

9.1.1 Configuration Rules .........................................................9-2

9.1.2 Planning Data..................................................................9-4

9.1.3 Configuration Flow...........................................................9-7

9.1.4 Configuring the Threshold Profile .....................................9-7

9.1.5 Binding the Threshold Profile ...........................................9-8

9.1.6 Configuration End ............................................................9-9

9.2 Configuring the Environment Monitoring Parameters ......................9-9

9.3 Configuring the Charging Mode....................................................9-11

9.4 Resetting the HCU-20 Card .........................................................9-12

9.5 Enabling the Rectifier Module.......................................................9-12

9.6 Viewing the Instant Performance of the HCU-20 Card...................9-13

9.7 Viewing Current Alarms of the HCU-20 Card ................................9-14

9.8 Viewing the Alarm History of the HCU-20 Card .............................9-15

10 Test Function .............................................................................................10-1

10.1 Subscriber Internal Line Test ........................................................10-2

10.1.1 Test Rules .....................................................................10-2

10.1.2 Signal Flow....................................................................10-2

10.1.3 Test Procedure ..............................................................10-3

10.1.4 Configuring the Subscriber Internal Line Test..................10-3

10.1.5 Checking the Subscriber Internal Line Test Result ..........10-4

10.1.6 Test Completed..............................................................10-4

10.2 Subscriber External Line Test.......................................................10-5

10.2.1 Test Rules .....................................................................10-5

10.2.2 Signal Flow....................................................................10-5

10.2.3 Test Procedure ..............................................................10-6

Page 22: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

10.2.4 Configuring the Subscriber External Line Test ................10-6

10.2.5 Checking the Subscriber External Line Test Result .........10-7

10.2.6 Test Completed..............................................................10-8

10.3 Ping Test .....................................................................................10-9

10.3.1 Test Purpose .................................................................10-9

10.3.2 Ping Test .......................................................................10-9

10.3.3 Viewing the Test Result ................................................10-11

Appendix A FTP Operation Guide .............................................................. A-1

A.1 Function Overview ........................................................................ A-1

A.2 Procedure..................................................................................... A-1

Page 23: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

Figures

Figure 1-1 The UNM2000 Network Diagram....................................................1-8

Figure 1-2 The Flow of Configuring the UNM2000 Management Channel ......1-12

Figure 2-1 The Flow of Adding Equipment.......................................................2-3

Figure 2-2 Creating the Logical Domain ..........................................................2-4

Figure 2-3 Logical Domain Creation Completed ..............................................2-5

Figure 2-4 Creating the Access NE .................................................................2-6

Figure 2-5 The Access NE Creation Completed ..............................................2-7

Figure 2-6 Result of Physical Configuration Detection .....................................2-8

Figure 2-7 The Subrack View..........................................................................2-8

Figure 2-8 The Subrack View (No Card Added)...............................................2-9

Figure 2-9 Adding Cards Manually ................................................................2-10

Figure 2-10 Configuring the SNMP Trap Receiver Address .............................2-11

Figure 2-11 Configuring the SNMP Time System ............................................2-12

Figure 2-12 Synchronizing System Time.........................................................2-13

Figure 2-13 Saving Current Configuration to Flash ..........................................2-14

Figure 3-1 Network Diagram for the H.248 Voice Service ................................3-3

Figure 3-2 Flow of H.248 Voice Service...........................................................3-9

Figure 3-3 Enabling Ports in a Batch Manner ................................................3-10

Figure 3-4 Enabling the POTS Port (Completed) ...........................................3-11

Figure 3-5 Configuring the Uplink Service VLAN ...........................................3-12

Figure 3-6 Configuring the Voice VLAN.........................................................3-12

Figure 3-7 Configuring Megaco / MGCP Softswitch Platform Parameters ......3-13

Figure 3-8 Configuring the Voice IPAddress .................................................3-14

Figure 3-9 Configuring Basic Voice Parameters ............................................3-14

Figure 3-10 Configuring the RTP Resource Profile ..........................................3-15

Figure 3-11 Configuring the Voice Port............................................................3-16

Figure 3-12 Checking the Voice Equipment Status..........................................3-17

Figure 3-13 Checking the Voice IPAddress Status..........................................3-18

Page 24: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

Figure 3-14 Checking the DSP Channel Status...............................................3-18

Figure 3-15 Checking the NGN User Port Status.............................................3-19

Figure 3-16 Network Diagram for the SIP Voice Service ..................................3-21

Figure 3-17 Flow of SIP Voice Service ............................................................3-28

Figure 3-18 Enabling Ports in a Batch Manner ................................................3-29

Figure 3-19 Enabling the POTS Port (Completed) ...........................................3-30

Figure 3-20 Configuring the Uplink Service VLAN ...........................................3-31

Figure 3-21 Configuring the Voice VLAN.........................................................3-32

Figure 3-22 Configuring the SIP Server...........................................................3-32

Figure 3-23 Configuring the Voice IPAddress .................................................3-33

Figure 3-24 Configuring Basic Voice Parameters ............................................3-34

Figure 3-25 Configuring the SIP Digitmap .......................................................3-35

Figure 3-26 Configuring the Voice Port............................................................3-35

Figure 3-27 Checking the Voice Equipment Status..........................................3-36

Figure 3-28 Checking the Voice IPAddress Status..........................................3-37

Figure 3-29 Checking the DSP Channel Status...............................................3-38

Figure 3-30 Checking the NGN User Port Status.............................................3-39

Figure 3-31 Network of PSTN Voice Services .................................................3-41

Figure 3-32 Flow of Configuring PSTN Voice Service ......................................3-46

Figure 3-33 Configuring the Local Node Name................................................3-47

Figure 3-34 Configuring E1 Data (the AN3300-C1 Side)..................................3-48

Figure 3-35 Configuring Clock Data ................................................................3-48

Figure 3-36 Configuring V5 Data.....................................................................3-49

Figure 3-37 Configuring C Channel Data.........................................................3-50

Figure 3-38 Configuring Node Data.................................................................3-50

Figure 3-39 Configuring the V5 PSTN User Data (the AN3300-C1 Side)..........3-51

Figure 3-40 Saving Current Configuration to Flash (at the AN3300-C1 Side) ...3-52

Figure 3-41 Configuring the Local Node Data..................................................3-53

Figure 3-42 Configuring E1 Data (the AN5006-20 Side) ..................................3-53

Figure 3-43 Configuring Clock ........................................................................3-54

Figure 3-44 Configuring the Remote Node Data..............................................3-55

Figure 3-45 Configuring the V5 PSTN User Data (the AN5006-20 Side) ..........3-56

Page 25: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

Figure 3-46 Saving Current Configuration to Flash (at the AN5006-20 Side) ....3-57

Figure 3-47 Checking E1 Status .....................................................................3-58

Figure 3-48 Checking Node Status .................................................................3-58

Figure 3-49 Configuring POTS Common Parameters......................................3-59

Figure 3-50 Configuring the Voice Timer .........................................................3-60

Figure 3-51 Configuring the DSP Profile .........................................................3-61

Figure 3-52 Configuring Fax Parameters ........................................................3-61

Figure 3-53 Configuring the POS Telephone Number......................................3-62

Figure 3-54 Configuring the IPT Number.........................................................3-63

Figure 3-55 Configuring the Timeout Duration of the Signal Tone.....................3-64

Figure 3-56 Configuring 2833 .........................................................................3-64

Figure 3-57 Configuring Voice MD5 Authentication .........................................3-65

Figure 3-58 Configuring the Howler Tone Timeout Processing Parameters ......3-66

Figure 3-59 Configuring the Caller ID Display Mode ........................................3-66

Figure 3-60 SIPAdvanced Configuration ........................................................3-67

Figure 3-61 Configuring the SIP User Call Profile ............................................3-68

Figure 3-62 Registering / Unregistering the MGC ............................................3-69

Figure 3-63 Registering / Unregistering the NGN Users...................................3-69

Figure 3-64 Viewing the Statistics Information of Signaling Packet ..................3-70

Figure 3-65 Viewing the Call Statistics Information ..........................................3-71

Figure 3-66 Viewing the Statistics Information of Voice Stream Port.................3-72

Figure 3-67 Viewing the Port Call Statistics Information...................................3-73

Figure 4-1 Network Diagram for the ADSL Data Service in the Transparent

Transmission Mode........................................................................4-3

Figure 4-2 Flow of Configuring the ADSL Data Service - Transparent Mode...4-11

Figure 4-3 Configuring the Uplink Service VLAN ...........................................4-12

Figure 4-4 Configuring the ADSL Line Profile for the ADSL Service in the

Transparent Transmission Mode ..................................................4-13

Figure 4-5 Modifying the ADSL Line Profile in a Batch Manner ......................4-14

Figure 4-6 Binding ADSL Ports to the ADSL Line Profile for the ADSL Service in

the Transparent Transmission Mode (Completed).........................4-14

Page 26: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

Figure 4-7 Configuring the Port Rate Limiting Profile for the ADSL Service in the

Transparent Transmission Mode ..................................................4-15

Figure 4-8 Binding ADSL Ports to the Rate Limiting Profile for the ADSL Service

in the Transparent Transmission Mode.........................................4-16

Figure 4-9 Configuring the PVC Profile for the ADSL Service in the Transparent

Transmission Mode......................................................................4-17

Figure 4-10 Binding ADSL Ports to the PVC Profile for the ADSL Service in the

Transparent Transmission Mode ..................................................4-18

Figure 4-11 Binding ADSL Ports to the PVC Profile for the ADSL Service in the

Transparent Transmission Mode (Completed) ..............................4-18

Figure 4-12 Selecting the Ports with PVC Index 0 for the ADSL Service in the

Transparent Transmission Mode ..................................................4-19

Figure 4-13 Selecting the Ports and the PVC to be Added with Data................4-20

Figure 4-14 Modifying the CVLAN Settings in a Batch Manner for the ADSL

Service in the Transparent Transmission Mode ............................4-21

Figure 4-15 The Port Service VLAN Configuration Completed for the ADSL

Service in the Transparent Transmission Mode ............................4-22

Figure 4-16 Enabling ADSL Ports for ADSL Services in the Transparent

Transmission Mode......................................................................4-23

Figure 4-17 Enabling the ADSL Ports for the ADSL Service in the Transparent

Transmission Mode (Completed)..................................................4-23

Figure 4-18 Enabling PVC for Multiple Ports in a Batch Manner for the ADSL

Service in the Transparent Transmission Mode ............................4-25

Figure 4-19 Completion of Enabling Port PVC-ADSL Service Transparent

Mode...........................................................................................4-25

Figure 4-20 Network Diagram for the ADSL Data Service in the Tag Mode ......4-27

Figure 4-21 The Configuration Flow of the ADSL Data Service in the Tag

Mode...........................................................................................4-34

Figure 4-22 Configuring the Uplink Service VLAN ...........................................4-35

Figure 4-23 Configuring the ADSL Line Profile for the ADSL Service in the Tag

Mode...........................................................................................4-36

Figure 4-24 Modifying the ADSL Line Profile in a Batch Manner ......................4-37

Figure 4-25 Binding ADSL Ports to the ADSL Line Profile for the ADSL Service in

the Tag Mode (Completed)...........................................................4-37

Page 27: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

Figure 4-26 Configuring the PVC Profile for the ADSL Service in the Tag

Mode...........................................................................................4-38

Figure 4-27 Binding ADSL Ports to the PVC Profile for the ADSL Service in the

Tag Mode ....................................................................................4-39

Figure 4-28 Binding ADSL Ports to the PVC Profile for the ADSL Service in the

Tag Mode (Completed).................................................................4-40

Figure 4-29 Configuring the Port Rate Limiting Profile for the ADSL Service in the

Tag Mode ....................................................................................4-40

Figure 4-30 Binding ADSL Ports to the Rate Limiting Profile for the ADSL Service

in the Tag Mode ...........................................................................4-41

Figure 4-31 Selecting the Ports with PVC Index 0 for the ADSL Service in the

Transparent Transmission Mode ..................................................4-42

Figure 4-32 Selecting the Ports and the PVC to be Added with Data................4-43

Figure 4-33 Modifying the CVLAN Settings in a Batch Manner for the ADSL

Service in the Transparent Transmission Mode ............................4-44

Figure 4-34 The Port Service VLAN Configuration Completed in the Tag Mode4-45

Figure 4-35 Enabling the ADSL Port for the ADSL Service in the Tag Mode.....4-46

Figure 4-36 Enabling the ADSL Port for the ADSL Service in the Tag Mode

(Completed).................................................................................4-46

Figure 4-37 Enabling PVC for Multiple Ports in a Batch Manner in the Tag

Mode...........................................................................................4-47

Figure 4-38 Completion of Enabling Port PVC for ADSL Service in the Tag

Mode...........................................................................................4-48

Figure 4-39 Network Diagram for the VDSL Data Service in the 1:1 Translation

Mode...........................................................................................4-49

Figure 4-40 The Configuration Flow of the VDSL Data Service in the 1:1

Translation Mode .........................................................................4-57

Figure 4-41 Configuring the Uplink Service VLAN ...........................................4-58

Figure 4-42 Configuring the VDSL Basic Profile for the VDSL Service in the 1:1

Translation Mode .........................................................................4-59

Figure 4-43 Binding VDSL Ports to the VDSL Basic Profile for the VDSL Service in

the 1:1 Translation Mode (Completed)..........................................4-60

Figure 4-44 Configuring the VDSL Service Profile for the VDSL Service in the 1:1

Translation Mode .........................................................................4-61

Page 28: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

Figure 4-45 Binding VDSL Ports to the VDSL Service Profile for the VDSL Service

in the 1:1 Translation Mode (Completed) ......................................4-62

Figure 4-46 Configuring the Port Rate Limiting Profile for the VDSL Service in the

1:1 Translation Mode ...................................................................4-63

Figure 4-47 Binding VDSL Ports to the Rate Limiting Profile for the VDSL Service

in the 1:1 Translation Mode (Completed) ......................................4-63

Figure 4-48 Selecting the Ports in the 1:1 Translation Mode ............................4-64

Figure 4-49 Selecting the Ports and the PVC to be Added with Data................4-65

Figure 4-50 Modifying the CVLAN Settings in a Batch Manner in the 1:1

Translation Mode .........................................................................4-66

Figure 4-51 The Port Service VLAN Configuration Completed in the 1:1

Translation Mode .........................................................................4-67

Figure 4-52 Enabling VDSL Ports for VDSL Services in the 1:1 Translation

Mode...........................................................................................4-68

Figure 4-53 Enabling the VDSL Ports for the VDSL Service in the 1:1 Translation

Mode (Completed) .......................................................................4-68

Figure 4-54 Network Diagram for the VDSL Data Service in the N:1 Translation

Mode...........................................................................................4-70

Figure 4-55 The Configuration Flow of the VDSL Data Service in the N:1

Translation Mode .........................................................................4-76

Figure 4-56 Configuring the Uplink Service VLAN ...........................................4-77

Figure 4-57 Configuring the VDSL Basic Line Profile for the VDSL Service in the

N:1 Translation Mode...................................................................4-78

Figure 4-58 Binding VDSL Ports to the VDSL Basic Line Profile for the VDSL

Service in the N:1 Translation Mode (Completed) .........................4-79

Figure 4-59 Configuring the VDSL Profile for the VDSL Service in the N:1

Translation Mode .........................................................................4-80

Figure 4-60 Binding VDSL Ports to the VDSL Service Profile for the VDSL Service

in the N:1 Translation Mode (Completed)......................................4-81

Figure 4-61 Configuring the Port Rate Limiting Profile for the VDSL Service in the

N:1 Translation Mode...................................................................4-82

Figure 4-62 Binding VDSL Ports to the Rate Limiting Profile for the VDSL Service

in the N:1 Translation Mode (Completed)......................................4-83

Page 29: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

Figure 4-63 The Port Service VLAN Configuration Completed in the N:1

Translation Mode .........................................................................4-84

Figure 4-64 Enabling the VDSL Ports for the VDSL Service in the N:1 Translation

Mode (Completed) .......................................................................4-85

Figure 5-1 Network Diagram of the G.SHDSL Service in the ATM Transparent

Mode.............................................................................................5-3

Figure 5-2 Configuration Flow of G.SHDSL Service - ATM Transparent Mode5-10

Figure 5-3 Configuring Uplink Port Properties for the SHDSL Service in the ATM

Transparent Transmission Mode ..................................................5-11

Figure 5-4 Enabling SHDSL Ports for the SHDSL Service in the ATM

Transparent Transmission Mode ..................................................5-12

Figure 5-5 Enabling the SHDSL Port for the SHDSL Service in the ATM

Transparent Mode (Completed)....................................................5-13

Figure 5-6 Enabling PVC for Multiple Ports in a Batch Manner - G.SHDSL

Service Configuration...................................................................5-14

Figure 5-7 Enabling Port PVC for the SHDSL Service in the Transparent Mode

(Completed).................................................................................5-14

Figure 5-8 Configuring the Uplink Service VLAN for the G.SHDSL Service in the

ATM Transparent Transmission Mode ..........................................5-15

Figure 5-9 Configuring the SHDSL Line Profile for the G.SHDSL Service in the

ATM Transparent Mode................................................................5-16

Figure 5-10 Binding SHDSL Ports to the SHDSL Line Profile for the G.SHDSL

Service in the ATM Transparent Mode..........................................5-17

Figure 5-11 Binding SHDSL Ports to the SHDSL Line Profile for the G.SHDSL

Service in the ATM Transparent Mode (Completed) ......................5-17

Figure 5-12 Configuring the PVC Profile for the G.SHDSL Service in the ATM

Transparent Mode........................................................................5-18

Figure 5-13 Binding SHDSL Ports to the PVC Profile for the G. SHDSL Service in

the ATM Transparent Transmission Mode.....................................5-19

Figure 5-14 Binding SHDSL Ports to the PVC Profile for the G. SHDSL Service in

the ATM Transparent Transmission Mode (Completed).................5-20

Figure 5-15 Configuring the Port Rate Limiting Profile for the G.SHDSL Service in

the ATM Transparent Transmission Mode.....................................5-21

Page 30: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

Figure 5-16 Binding SHDSL Ports to the Rate Limiting Profile for the G. SHDSL

Service in the ATM Transparent Transmission Mode ....................5-22

Figure 5-17 Binding SHDSL Ports to the Rate Limiting Profile for the G.SHDSL

Service in the ATM Transparent Transmission Mode (Completed).5-22

Figure 5-18 Configuring the SHDSL Port Bound Group Parameters for the G.

SHDSL Service in the ATM Transparent Transmission Mode ........5-23

Figure 5-19 Selecting the Ports with PVC Index 0 for the G.SHDSL Service in the

ATM Transparent Transmission Mode ..........................................5-24

Figure 5-20 Selecting the Ports and the PVC to be Added with Data................5-25

Figure 5-21 Modifying the CVLAN Settings in a Batch Manner for the G.SHDSL

Service in the ATM Transparent Transmission Mode ....................5-26

Figure 5-22 The Port Service VLAN Configuration Completed for the G.SHDSL

Service in the ATM Transparent Mode..........................................5-27

Figure 5-23 Network Diagram of the G.SHDSL Service in the TDM Transparent

Mode...........................................................................................5-28

Figure 5-24 Flow Chart for Configuring the G.SHDSL Service in the TDM

Transparent Transmission Mode ..................................................5-31

Figure 5-25 Configuring E1 Data for the G.SHDSL Service in the TDM

Transparent Transmission Mode ..................................................5-32

Figure 5-26 Configuring Clock for the G.SHDSL Service in the TDM Transparent

Transmission Mode......................................................................5-33

Figure 5-27 Enabling the SHDSL Port for the G.SHDSL Service in the TDM

Transparent Transmission Mode ..................................................5-34

Figure 5-28 Enabling the SHDSL Port for the G.SHDSL Service in the TDM

Transparent Transmission Mode (Completed) ..............................5-34

Figure 5-29 Configuring the SHDSL Line Profile for the G.SHDSL Service in the

TDM Transparent Transmission Mode..........................................5-35

Figure 5-30 Binding SHDSL Ports to the SHDSL Line Profile for the G.SHDSL

Service in the TDM Transparent Transmission Mode (Completed) 5-36

Figure 5-31 Binding SHDSL Ports to the SHDSL Line Profile for the G.SHDSL

Service in the TDM Transparent Transmission Mode (Completed) 5-37

Figure 6-1 Multicast Service Network in the Proxy Mode .................................6-3

Figure 6-2 Configuration Flow in the Proxy Mode ............................................6-6

Figure 6-3 Disabling the Uplink Port Multicast Packet Suppression..................6-7

Page 31: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

Figure 6-4 Configuring the Uplink Service VLAN .............................................6-7

Figure 6-5 Configuring the OLT Multicast Mode...............................................6-8

Figure 6-6 Configuring the Multicast Proxy IPAddress in the Proxy Mode........6-9

Figure 6-7 Configuring Multicast Default VLAN..............................................6-10

Figure 6-8 Selecting the Ports with PVC Index 0 in the Proxy Mode...............6-11

Figure 6-9 Selecting the Ports and the PVC to be Added with Data................6-12

Figure 6-10 Modifying the CVLAN Settings in a Batch Manner in the Proxy

Mode...........................................................................................6-13

Figure 6-11 The Port Service VLAN Configuration Completed in the Proxy

Mode...........................................................................................6-14

Figure 6-12 Modifying ADSL Port Enable Flag in a Batch Manner....................6-15

Figure 6-13 Configuration for Enabling the ADSL Port Completed ...................6-15

Figure 6-14 Viewing Online Multicast Group Information .................................6-16

Figure 6-15 Viewing Online Group Information of a Specified Port in the Proxy

Mode...........................................................................................6-17

Figure 6-16 Checking the Core Switch Card’s Multicast Address Table in the Proxy

Mode...........................................................................................6-18

Figure 6-17 Checking the Line Card’s Multicast Address Table in the Proxy

Mode...........................................................................................6-18

Figure 6-18 Network Diagram for Multicast Service in the Controlled Mode......6-20

Figure 6-19 Configuration Flow in the Controlled Mode ...................................6-24

Figure 6-20 Disabling the Uplink Port Multicast Packet Suppression................6-25

Figure 6-21 Configuring the Uplink Service VLAN ...........................................6-26

Figure 6-22 Configuring the Controllable Multicast Mode.................................6-26

Figure 6-23 Configuring the Multicast Proxy IPAddress in the Controllable

Mode...........................................................................................6-27

Figure 6-24 Configuring Default Multicast VLAN in the Controllable Mode .......6-28

Figure 6-25 Configuring the Multicast Profile ...................................................6-29

Figure 6-26 Configuring Multicast Group Parameters ......................................6-30

Figure 6-27 Configuring Multicast Port Parameters .........................................6-30

Figure 6-28 Selecting Ports in the Controllable Mode ......................................6-31

Figure 6-29 Selecting the Ports and the PVC to be Added with Data................6-32

Page 32: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

Figure 6-30 Modifying the CVLAN Settings in a Batch Manner in the Controllable

Mode...........................................................................................6-33

Figure 6-31 The Port Service VLAN Configuration Completed in the Controllable

Mode...........................................................................................6-34

Figure 6-32 Enabling the VDSL Ports (Completed)..........................................6-35

Figure 6-33 Checking the Online Multicast Group Information for a Normal

User ............................................................................................6-36

Figure 6-34 Checking the Online Multicast Group Information for a Preview

User ............................................................................................6-36

Figure 6-35 Viewing the Online Group Information of a Specified Port in the

Controllable Mode........................................................................6-37

Figure 6-36 Checking the MCU Card’s Multicast Address Table in the Controlled

Mode...........................................................................................6-38

Figure 6-37 Checking the Line Card’s Multicast Address Table in the Controllable

Mode...........................................................................................6-38

Figure 7-1 Flow of Upgrading the Management Control Card ..........................7-4

Figure 7-2 Saving the Configuration into the Flash ..........................................7-5

Figure 7-3 Backing up the Current Configuration Data.....................................7-6

Figure 7-4 Backing up the System Software....................................................7-6

Figure 7-5 Upgrading the Management Control Card ......................................7-7

Figure 7-6 Resetting the Management Control Card........................................7-7

Figure 7-7 Checking the Software Version of the Management Control Card....7-8

Figure 7-8 The Flow of Upgrading the ADSL Interface Card Software ............7-10

Figure 7-9 Upgrading Software of the ADSL Interface Card in a Batch

Manner........................................................................................7-10

Figure 7-10 Resetting the ADSL Interface Card...............................................7-11

Figure 7-11 Checking the Software Version of the ADSL Interface Card ..........7-11

Figure 7-12 Flow of Upgrading the Uplink Subcard of the MCUA Card.............7-13

Figure 7-13 Upgrading the Uplink Subcard of the MCUA Card.........................7-13

Figure 7-14 Rebooting the Uplink Subcard of the MCUA Card.........................7-14

Figure 7-15 Viewing Software Version of the MCUA Card's Uplink Subcard.....7-14

Figure 8-1 Manual Aggregation Network Diagram ...........................................8-3

Figure 8-2 Flow of Configuring Manual Aggregation ........................................8-5

Page 33: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

Figure 8-3 Configuring the Ethernet Ports of the Management Control Card -

Manual Aggregation.......................................................................8-6

Figure 8-4 Configuring Aggregation Mode - Manual Aggregation .....................8-6

Figure 8-5 Configuring Aggregation Ports - Manual Aggregation......................8-7

Figure 8-6 Static LACPAggregation Network Diagram ....................................8-8

Figure 8-7 Configuration Flow of Static LACPAggregation ............................8-11

Figure 8-8 Configuring the Ethernet Ports of the Management Control Card -

Static LACPAggregation..............................................................8-12

Figure 8-9 Configuring LACP Global Parameters ..........................................8-12

Figure 8-10 Configuring the LACP Port Parameters ........................................8-13

Figure 8-11 Configuring Aggregation Mode - Static LACPAggregation ............8-14

Figure 8-12 Configuring Aggregation Ports - Static LACPAggregation.............8-14

Figure 9-1 Flow of Configuring Environment Alarm Instance............................9-7

Figure 9-2 Configuring the Environment Monitoring Threshold Profile ..............9-8

Figure 9-3 Binding the Environment Monitoring Threshold Profile ....................9-8

Figure 9-4 Configuring Environment Monitoring Parameters..........................9-11

Figure 9-5 Configuring the Charging Mode....................................................9-12

Figure 9-6 Resetting the HCU-20 Card .........................................................9-12

Figure 9-7 Enabling the Rectifier Module.......................................................9-13

Figure 9-8 Checking the Instant Performance of the HCU Card .....................9-14

Figure 9-9 Viewing the Current Alarms of the HCU Card................................9-14

Figure 9-10 Checking the Alarm History of the HCU Card................................9-15

Figure 10-1 Signal Flow of the Subscriber Internal Line Test............................10-2

Figure 10-2 The Flow of Subscriber Internal Line Test .....................................10-3

Figure 10-3 Configuring Subscriber Internal Line Test .....................................10-4

Figure 10-4 Checking the Subscriber Internal Line Test Result ........................10-4

Figure 10-5 Signal Flow of the Subscriber External Line Test...........................10-5

Figure 10-6 Flow of Subscriber External Line Test...........................................10-6

Figure 10-7 Configuring the Subscriber External Line Test ..............................10-7

Figure 10-8 Checking the Subscriber External Line Test Result .......................10-8

Figure 10-9 Configuring the Ping Test Parameters ........................................10-10

Figure 10-10 Ping Test ...................................................................................10-11

Page 34: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

Figure A-1 Opening the WFTP Software......................................................... A-1

Figure A-2 Accessing the User Configuration GUI .......................................... A-2

Figure A-3 Adding New FTP User and Setting the User Name to 1 ................. A-2

Figure A-4 Entering User Password 1............................................................. A-3

Figure A-5 Enter the Directory of Upgrade Package / Backup Package........... A-3

Figure A-6 Configuring Log Function of the WFTP Tool................................... A-4

Figure A-7 Logging Options ........................................................................... A-4

Page 35: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

Tables

Table 1-1 Planning Data for Configuring the UNM2000 Management

Channel.........................................................................................1-8

Table 2-1 The Card Configuration for the Equipment......................................2-9

Table 3-1 Planning Data for the H.248 Voice Service .....................................3-3

Table 3-2 Planning Data for the SIP Voice Service .......................................3-21

Table 3-3 Planning Data of the PSTN Voice Service on the AN3300-C1

Side.............................................................................................3-42

Table 3-4 Planning Data of the PSTN Voice Service on the AN5006-20 Side3-44

Table 4-1 Planning Data for the ADSL Service in the Transparent Transmission

Mode.............................................................................................4-3

Table 4-2 Planning Data for the ADSL Service in the Tag Mode....................4-27

Table 4-3 Planning Data for the VDSL Data Service in the 1:1 Translation

Mode...........................................................................................4-50

Table 4-4 Planning Data of the VDSL Data Service in the N:1 Translation

Mode...........................................................................................4-71

Table 5-1 Planning Data for the G.SHDSL Service in the ATM Transparent

Transmission Mode........................................................................5-3

Table 5-2 Planning Data for the G.SHDSL Service in the TDM Transparent

Mode...........................................................................................5-29

Table 6-1 Planning Data of Multicast Service in the Proxy Mode.....................6-3

Table 6-2 Planning Data of Multicast Service in the Controlled Mode............6-20

Table 7-1 Planning Data for Upgrading the Management Control Card ...........7-3

Table 7-2 Association between Upgrade Object and Download File Type.......7-8

Table 7-3 Planning Data for Upgrading the ADSL Interface Card Software .....7-9

Table 7-4 Planning Data for Upgrading the Uplink Subcard of the MCUA

Card ............................................................................................7-12

Table 8-1 Planning Data of Manual Aggregation Mode...................................8-4

Table 8-2 Planning Data of Static LACPAggregation Mode............................8-9

Table 9-1 Relationship among Alarm Codes, Alarm Report Threshold

Parameters and Alarm Clearing Threshold Parameters ..................9-2

Page 36: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

Table 9-2 Planning Data for Configuring the Environment Monitoring

Instance ........................................................................................9-4

Table 9-3 Planning Data for Configuring the Environment Monitoring

Parameters....................................................................................9-9

Table 10-1 Ping Test Parameters.................................................................10-10

Table 10-2 Ping Test Result.........................................................................10-11

Page 37: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

11 Configuring the UNM2000Management Channel

Before using the UNM2000 to manage the AN5006-20, users need to configure the

UNM2000 management channel via the Console control platform (abbreviated as

Console in the following). The following introduces how to configure the UNM2000

management channel.

Logging into the Console

Configuring the UNM2000 Management Channel

Logging into the UNM2000

Version: B/1 1-1

Page 38: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

1.11.1 Logging into the Console

The following introduces how to log into the Console.

1.1.11.1.1 First-time Login to the Console

Log into the Console through the Window’s Hyper Terminal to access the CLI

network management system for the equipment.

Prerequisite

u The network management computer has been connected with the equipment

by the Console cable.

u The network management computer has been started normally.

u The equipment is powered on normally.

u The user name and password for logging in the CLI network management

system for the AN5006-20 are available.

Procedure

1. Click the Start menu on the desktop, and select All ProgramsíAccessories

íTelecomíHyper Terminal to bring up the Connection Description dialog

box.

Note:

The Windows XP operating system is used as an example here.

2. In the Connection Description dialog box, configure the parameters as

follows:

4 Name: Fill in the name of a connection object, e.g. FiberHome CLI

Control Terminal.

4 Icon: Select an icon for this connection.

1-2 Version: B/1

Page 39: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

1 Configuring the UNM2000 Management Channel

Click OK, and the Connect To dialog box appears.

3. Select the COM1 port of the Console interface on the management control card

in the drop-down list of the Connect using field in the Connect To dialog box.

Click OK, and the COM1 Properties dialog box appears.

4. In the COM1 Properties dialog box, click the Restore Defaults button. The

default configurations are as below:

4 Bits per second: 9600

4 Data bits: 8

4 Parity: None

4 Stop bits: 1

Version: B/1 1-3

Annderson Weshleen
Page 40: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

4 Flow control: None

Click OK to start up the Console.

5. Press the <ENTER> key, and enter the user name and the password to log into

the CLI network management system. The commands are as follows:Login:GEPON

// The default user is common user, and the user name is GEPON.

Password:*****

// The initial password is GEPON.

User>enable

1-4 Version: B/1

Annderson Weshleen
Annderson Weshleen
Annderson Weshleen
Page 41: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

1 Configuring the UNM2000 Management Channel

// In the read-only mode, use the enable command to enter the management mode.

Password:*****

// The initial password of the administrator account is GEPON.

Admin#

// After the prompt Admin⇤appears, you can enter command lines to perform network management

operations on the AN5006-20.

Note:

u If the command prompt is User>, the system is in the common user

mode; if the command prompt is Admin#, the system is in the

administrator mode.

u The user name is case insensitive, while the password should be

capitalized.

Caution:

To enhance the security of the system, users should memorize their

passwords and keep them secret. Regularly changing passwords is

strongly recommended.

6. Select FileíSave from the menu bar of the Console window to save the

configurations for the Console.

1.1.21.1.2 Subsequent Login to the Console

After establishing the Console for the AN5006-20 CLI network management system

in their first login, users can directly access the Console via the CLI network

management system the next time.

Prerequisite

u The network management computer has been connected with the equipment

by the Console cable.

u The network management computer has been started normally.

u The equipment is powered on normally.

Version: B/1 1-5

Annderson Weshleen
Page 42: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

u The Console for the AN5006-20's CLI network management system has been

set up (the following takes the FiberHome CLI Control Terminal as an

example).

Procedure

1. Select StartíProgramíAccessoriesíTelecomíHyperTerminalí

FiberHome CLI Control Terminal from the desktop to bring up the Telnet

default? alert box.

4 Click Yes, the Hyper Terminal will be used as the default Telnet program;

4 Click No, the Hyper Terminal will not be used as the default Telnet

program.

Enter the established Console.

Note:

To set up a shortcut for convenience, drag and drop FiberHome CLI

Control Terminal to the desktop.

1.21.2 Configuring the UNM2000 ManagementChannel

The following introduces how to configure the UNM2000 management channel.

1.2.11.2.1 Configuration Rules

The rules for configuring the UNM2000 management channel are described as

follows:

u The MCUA card is required for the equipment to perform the MSAN uplink.

u The equipment can support up to four management VLANs, thus the user can

manage the equipment even in a complex network.

1-6 Version: B/1

Page 43: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

1 Configuring the UNM2000 Management Channel

u When configuring the UNM2000 management channel, if the IP address of the

UNM2000 client end and the equipment management IP address are not in the

same network segment, users should configure the static routing to perform

routing and forwarding.

u While configuring the static routing, users need to configure the IP address and

mask of the destination network segment and the gateway address of the next-

hop routing.

u The management VLAN and IP address are only valid in the equipment CPU.

Users need to configure the corresponding uplink service VLAN for the

management port.

u If the VLAN tag processing mode is set to untag, the port default VLAN should

be configured.

u QinQ management VLANs are supported to provide users with double-layer

management channels.

1.2.21.2.2 Network Diagram

The UNM2000 client end manages the equipment via the equipment’s uplink ports.

The management is implemented in two ways: management based on LAN and

management via gateway. In this example, the client end performs remote

management of the AN5006-20 via the network gateway, and the AN5006-20 uses

the MCUA card. See Figure 1-1 for the network diagram of the UNM2000.

Version: B/1 1-7

Page 44: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

Figure 1-1 The UNM2000 Network Diagram

1.2.31.2.3 Planning Data

Table 1-1 lists the planning data for configuring the UNM2000 management

channel for the AN5006-20.

Table 1-1 Planning Data for Configuring the UNM2000 Management Channel

Procedure Parameter Meaning Description Example

Configuring the

Management VLAN

manage vlan ipv4

name <vlanname>

Management VLAN

name

Designate the service name

for the current configuration

item. Set the value to a

character string that contains

no more than 16 bytes.

Compulsory.

mngvlan

svlan tpid

<tpid>

SVLAN Tag protocol

identifier

The protocol type in the outer

or single VLAN tag. The

default setting is 33024

(0x8100).

This parameter is compulsory.

33024

1-8 Version: B/1

Page 45: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

1 Configuring the UNM2000 Management Channel

Table 1-1 Planning Data for Configuring the UNM2000 Management Channel (Continued)

Procedure Parameter Meaning Description Example

cos <cos> SVLAN priority

The priority of the outer or

single VLAN tag. The value

ranges from 0 to 7.

Compulsory.

7

vid <value> SVLAN ID

The VLAN ID of the outer or

single VLAN tag. The value

ranges from 1 to 4095.

This parameter is compulsory.

1

{[cvlan] tpid

<tpid> cos <cos>

vid <value>}*1

CVLAN Tag protocol

identifier

The protocol type in the inner

VLAN tag. The default setting

is 33024 (0x8100).

Optional. Configured when the

management VLAN is double-

tagged.

-

CVLAN priority

The priority of the inner VLAN

tag. The value ranges from 0

to 7.

Compulsory. Configure this

item when the management

VLAN is double-tagged.

-

CVLAN ID

The VLAN ID of the inner

VLAN tag. The value ranges

from 1 to 4095.

Compulsory. Configure this

item when the management

VLAN is double-tagged.

-

ip <A.B.C.D>Management IP

address

The valid IPv4 address in

dotted decimal notation.

Compulsory.

10.98.20.

20

mask <A.B.C.D>Management IP

mask

The valid IPv4 address in

dotted decimal notation.

Compulsory.

255.255.0.

0

{[gateway] <A.B.

C.D>}*1Default gateway

In the same network segment

with an existed IP address of

the equipment.

Optional.

-

Version: B/1 1-9

Page 46: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

Table 1-1 Planning Data for Configuring the UNM2000 Management Channel (Continued)

Procedure Parameter Meaning Description Example

{[pontype] [pon|

dpon]}*1

Identifying the uplink

PON port type

It is valid when the OLT

delivers the management

VLAN to the AN5006-20.

Optional.

-

Adding the uplink

service VLAN

uplink vlan {id

<id>}*1

Uplink VLAN service

ID

Optional. The system

automatically assigns the ID

when the parameter is not

configured.

-

<name>Uplink VLAN service

name

Designate the service name

for the current configuration

item. Set the value to a

character string that contains

no more than 30 bytes.

Compulsory.

mngvlan

start <startVid> Starting VLAN ID

The starting ID value of the

management VLAN

Compulsory.

1

end <endVid> Ending VLAN ID

The ending ID value of the

management VLAN

Compulsory.

1

1-10 Version: B/1

Page 47: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

1 Configuring the UNM2000 Management Channel

Table 1-1 Planning Data for Configuring the UNM2000 Management Channel (Continued)

Procedure Parameter Meaning Description Example

[tag|untag]The tag processing

mode

The mode of processing the

VLAN tag. Defines whether to

strip the VLAN tag from the

control message transmitted

from the management control

card port. The options include

tag and untag.

u Select the untag mode

when no other equipment

which can strip the VLAN

tag exists between the PC

and the AN5006-20 (for

example, when the PC is

directly connected with

the equipment or via the

HUB).

u Select the tag mode when

any other equipment

which can strip the VLAN

tag exist between the PC

and the AN5006-20.

Compulsory.

tag

[portno|

trunkid]

Uplink VLAN

associated port type

The options include port

(general port) and trunk (link

aggregation group).

Compulsory.

portno

<ifStr>

Port number or link

aggregation group

number

The port number ranges from

1 to 4, and the link aggregation

group number should be set to

1.

This parameter can be typed

in one of the three forms as

below:

u A single port: portno 5/1;

u Multiple ports: portno 5/

1,3;

u Port range: portno 5/1-3.

5 indicates the slot number of

the management control card.

This parameter is compulsory.

5/1

Version: B/1 1-11

Page 48: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

Table 1-1 Planning Data for Configuring the UNM2000 Management Channel (Continued)

Procedure Parameter Meaning Description Example

Configuring the static

routing

add static route

ipv4 destination

<A.B.C.D>

Destination network

IP address

The IP address of network

containing the network

management server. The valid

IPv4 address in dotted decimal

notation.

Compulsory.

10.78.20.

122

gateway <A.B.C.

D>Gateway IPAddress

The gateway IP address of the

network segment where the

equipment is located. The

valid IPv4 address in dotted

decimal notation.

Compulsory.

10.98.1.

254

mask <A.B.C.D>Gateway subnet

mask

The gateway subnet mask of

the segment where the

equipment is located. The

valid IPv4 address in dotted

decimal notation.

Compulsory.

255.255.0.

0

1.2.41.2.4 Configuration Flow

The flow of configuring the UNM2000 management channel is shown in Figure 1-2.

Figure 1-2 The Flow of Configuring the UNM2000 Management Channel

1-12 Version: B/1

Page 49: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

1 Configuring the UNM2000 Management Channel

1.2.51.2.5 Configuring the Management VLAN

Command Format

Command

cd vlan

add manage vlan ipv4 name <vlanname> svlan tpid <tpid> cos <cos> vid <value>

{[cvlan] tpid <tpid> cos <cos> vid <value>}*1 ip <A.B.C.D> mask <A.B.C.D>

{[gateway] <A.B.C.D>}*1 {[pontype] [pon/dpon]}*1

Configuration Procedure

1. Access the vlan directory.Admin#cd vlan

Admin\vlan#

2. Create the management VLAN.Admin\vlan#add manage vlan ipv4 name mngvlan svlan tpid 33024 cos 7 vid 1 ip

10.98.20.20 mask 255.255.0.0

Admin\vlan#

1.2.61.2.6 Adding Uplink Service VLAN

Command Format

Command

add uplink vlan {id <id>}*1 <name> start <startVid> end <endVid> [tag|

untag] [portno|trunk] <port>

Configuration Procedure

1. Add the uplink service VLAN.Admin\vlan#add uplink vlan mngvlan start 1 end 1 tag portno 5/1

Admin\vlan#

1.2.71.2.7 Configuring the Static Routing

Command Format

Command

cd ..

cd device

Version: B/1 1-13

Annderson Weshleen
Annderson Weshleen
Annderson Weshleen
Annderson Weshleen
Page 50: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

Command

add static route ipv4 designated <A.B.C.D> gateway <A.B.C.D> mask <A.B.C.D>

save

Configuration Procedure

1. Switch the vlan directory to the device directory.Admin\vlan#cd ..

Admin#cd device

Admin\device#

2. Configure the static routings.Admin\device#add static route ipv4 designated 10.78.20.122 gateway 10.98.1.254 mask

255.255.0.0

Admin\device#

3. Save configuration.Admin\device#cd ..

Admin\#save

Save Config ... OK.

Admin\#

1.2.81.2.8 Configuration Result

The configuration of the UNM2000 management channel is completed after the

aforesaid steps. Users can manage and maintain the AN5006-20 by logging into the

UNM2000 on the network management computer.

1.31.3 Logging into the UNM2000

Prerequisites

u JRE1.6.0 has been installed.

u The server end is running normally.

u The communication between the server end and client end is normal.

Procedure

1. Double-click the browser icon, enter http://server end IP address:port

number/webstart/ (for example, http://10.98.20.53:8080/webstart/) in the

1-14 Version: B/1

Annderson Weshleen
Annderson Weshleen
Annderson Weshleen
Annderson Weshleen
Annderson Weshleen
Page 51: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

1 Configuring the UNM2000 Management Channel

address field of the browser, and press Enter to access the page for installing

the UNM2000 client end.

Note:

The port number refers to the Tomcat access port number that users set

when installing the server end.

2. Click UNM2000 client end to bring up the alert box as shown below to perform

download validation and installation of the client end software.

3. Enter the username and password (both are admin by default) in the Log into

UNM2000 dialog box that appears. Fill in the IP address of the corresponding

server in Server and click Log in.

Version: B/1 1-15

Page 52: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

Note:

If you log in the UNM2000 successfully, the server end and client end

have both been installed correctly.

1-16 Version: B/1

Page 53: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

22 Adding Equipment

After logging into the UNM2000, users need to add the to-be-managed AN5006-20

to a logical domain so as to manage and maintain it. The following introduces the

steps for adding equipment.

Configuration Rules

Configuration Flow

Creating the Logical Domain

Creating the Access NE

Adding Cards

Configuring the SNMP Trap Receiver Address

Configuring the SNMP Time System

Synchronizing Time

Saving Current Configuration to Flash

Version: B/1 2-1

Page 54: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

2.12.1 Configuration Rules

u If the LAN network management mode is used, the IP address of the system

should be consistent with the equipment IP address set for the in-band

management VLAN, so that the network management server can communicate

normally with the AN5006-20. For example, if the equipment IP address set for

the management VLAN is 10.98.20.20, the IP address of the system should

also be set to 10.98.20.20.

u When the network management computer and the equipment are not in the

same LAN, users need to manage the equipment through a gateway. In such

case, the IP address of the system and the gateway IP address of the

equipment set for the management VLAN should be in the same network

segment, so that the network management computer can access and manage

the AN5006-20 through the gateway. For example, if the gateway IP address of

the equipment set in the management VLAN is 10.98.x.x (the subnet mask is

255.255.0.0), the IP address of the system should also be set to 10.98.x.x (the

subnet mask is 255.255.0.0, and must be different from the IP address of the

gateway).

2.22.2 Configuration Flow

See Figure 2-1 for the flow of adding equipment.

2-2 Version: B/1

Page 55: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

2 Adding Equipment

Figure 2-1 The Flow of Adding Equipment

2.32.3 Creating the Logical Domain

Divide the management objects by creating the corresponding logical domains

according to the requirements of the operators to enable management based on

authorization and domain.

Procedure

1. Right-click a blank area of the Main Topology pane and select Create Logical

Domain from the shortcut menu to bring up the Create Global Logical

Domain dialog box.

Version: B/1 2-3

Page 56: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

Figure 2-2 Creating the Logical Domain

2. Enter the desired name in the Logical Domain Name field. Alias Name and

Remark are optional items.

3. Click OK to save the settings and create a new logical domain.

2-4 Version: B/1

Page 57: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

2 Adding Equipment

Figure 2-3 Logical Domain Creation Completed

2.42.4 Creating the Access NE

Add the AN5006-20 module to the UNM2000.

Procedure

1. Right-click the created logical domain and select Create NEíCreate access

NE... from the shortcut menu.

2. Configure the parameters in the Create Access NE dialog box. See Figure 2-4.

Version: B/1 2-5

Page 58: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

Figure 2-4 Creating the Access NE

3. Click OK and the newly created access NE will appear in the main topology, as

illustrated in Figure 2-5.

2-6 Version: B/1

Page 59: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

2 Adding Equipment

Figure 2-5 The Access NE Creation Completed

2.52.5 Adding Cards

Two ways of adding a card exist: automatic adding and manual adding.

u Automatic adding: You can use the function of detecting physical configuration

to add a card automatically if it is present.

u Manual adding: Users can pre-configure to add a card if it is not present. The

manual adding is also available if the card is present.

2.5.12.5.1 Adding Cards Automatically

The cards can be automatically added to the slots through automatic detection of

the current physical configuration of the AN5006-20.

Version: B/1 2-7

Page 60: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

Procedure

1. Right-click the NE to be configured in the Main Topology pane and select

Detect Physical Configuration from the shortcut menu to open the Detect

Physical Configuration tab.

2. Select the desired synchronization mode.

3. Click the Detect Physical Configuration (D) button and wait until the detection

is completed, as shown in Figure 2-6.

Figure 2-6 Result of Physical Configuration Detection

4. Click the Synchronize All button and click OK when the Synchronize

Operation Succeed. message appears to complete adding the card

automatically.

5. Double-click the NE in the Main Topology pane to open the NE manager and

check the current card configuration, as shown in Figure 2-7.

Figure 2-7 The Subrack View

2-8 Version: B/1

Page 61: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

2 Adding Equipment

2.5.22.5.2 Adding Cards Manually

Slot Distribution

After adding the AN5006-20 module, click this module in the Device Tree. and its

subrack view will appear in the right pane, as shown in Figure 2-8.

Figure 2-8 The Subrack View (No Card Added)

The cards that can be configured in the AN5006-20 subrack view are listed in

Table 2-1.

Table 2-1 The Card Configuration for the Equipment

Card Name Applicable Slot Quantity

AD32 1 to 4 0 to 4

AD64 1 to 4 0 to 4

CASA 1 to 4 0 to 4

VD32 1 to 4 0 to 4

POTS32 1 to 4 0 to 4

POTS 1 to 4 0 to 4

HDT8A 1 to 4 0 to 4

HDT8B 1 to 4 0 to 4

HD32A 1 to 4 0 to 4

MCUA / MCUB 5 1

PWRB 6 1

FANB 7 1

HCU-20 801 0 to 1

Version: B/1 2-9

Page 62: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

Procedure

Add the AD64 card in Slot 1 manually in the subrack view. See below for the

operation procedures:

1. Right-click the slot to be added with a card, and select Add Card from the

shortcut menu. Then select the desired card type from the submenu that

appears subsequently.

Figure 2-9 Adding Cards Manually

Modifying Cards

u Right-click the card to be modified in the subrack view, and select Attribute

from the shortcut menu that appears. Then modify the card attributes in the

dialog box that appears.

u Right-click the card to be deleted in the subrack view, and select Delete Card

from the shortcut menu. The card will then be deleted.

u Right-click the card to be replaced in the subrack view, and select Replace

Card from the shortcut menu. Then select the new card type in the submenu.

After replacing the card, reconfigure parameters for the new card or use the

system default configurations.

2.62.6 Configuring the SNMP Trap ReceiverAddress

Configure the SNMP Trap receiver address, and then the system will send the Trap

message to the address.

2-10 Version: B/1

Page 63: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

2 Adding Equipment

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE

manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to

bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. Select Common ConfigíSNMP TRAP Receiver IP from the Operational

Tree pane to bring up the SNMP TRAP Receiver IP tab.

4. Click Add on the toolbar. In the Enter the number of rows to add dialog box

that appears, type 1 and click OK to add an SNMP TRAP receiver address.

5. Configure the SNMP Trap receiver address (the IP address of the network

management server in use), UDP port number, community name and SNMP

version.

6. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,

as shown in Figure 2-10.

Figure 2-10 Configuring the SNMP Trap Receiver Address

2.72.7 Configuring the SNMP Time System

Configure the SNMP time system, including the interval for time synchronization and

the IP address of the network management system server.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE

manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to

bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. Select Common ConfigíTime ConfigíTime Management from the

Operational Tree, and select the Snmp System Time Config tab.

4. Configure the EMS synchronization interval and the IP address of the EMS

server.

Version: B/1 2-11

Page 64: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,

as shown in Figure 2-11.

Figure 2-11 Configuring the SNMP Time System

2.82.8 Synchronizing Time

System time synchronization aims to synchronize the network management server

with the equipment in time and check whether the communication between them is

smooth.

Note:

After being connected to the network management server, the equipment

will apply to the server for time synchronization. When connected to

multiple network management servers, the equipment will apply to the

first server connected to it for time synchronization. To choose another

network management server for time synchronization of the equipment,

users can reconfigure the SNMP time system.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE

manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to

bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select System ControlíTime Calibration to

bring up the Issue the command dialog box, as shown in Figure 2-12.

2-12 Version: B/1

Page 65: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

2 Adding Equipment

Figure 2-12 Synchronizing System Time

4. Click OK to start executing the time synchronization command.

5. After the time calibration is completed successfully, click the Close button.

2.92.9 Saving Current Configuration to Flash

To prevent loss of equipment configuration data subsequent to power failure, it is

recommended that users should take this operation after they have completed

service provisioning and function configuration.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE

manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to

bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select System ControlíSave Config to Flash

to bring up the Issue the command alert box, as shown in Figure 2-13.

Version: B/1 2-13

Page 66: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

Figure 2-13 Saving Current Configuration to Flash

4. Click OK to start saving the configuration data to Flash.

5. After the data saving is completed, click the Close button.

2-14 Version: B/1

Page 67: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

33 Configuring Voice Services

The following introduces how to start up the voice services for the AN5006-20.

Note:

The PSTN voice service is supported by the MCUA card only; while the

NGN voice service is supported by the MCUB, MCUC, MCUD, MCU-

EPON, MCU-EPON2, MCU-GPON and MCU-GPON2 card.

Example of Configuring NGN Voice Service - H.248

Example of Configuring NGN Voice Service - SIP

Example of Configuring PSTN Voice Service

Common Configuration

MEGACO / MGCP Configuration

SIP Configuration

Registering / Unregistering the MGC

Registering / Unregistering the NGN User

Viewing the Voice Statistics Information

Version: B/1 3-1

Page 68: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

3.13.1 Example of Configuring NGN Voice Service -H.248

The following gives an example to introduce how to configure the VoIP service using

the H.248 protocol.

3.1.13.1.1 Configuration Rules

u When the softswitch platform uses the H.248 protocol to control the access

terminals, you should set the MGC protocol type to the H.248 protocol for VoIP

services, and set the protocol port No. to 2944.

u The POTS card provides 64 interfaces; the CASA / POTS32 card provides 32

interfaces.

u When configuring the step of the variable part of the RTP resource name,

please note that the value 0 cannot be used, and the value of (end value of the

variable part - the start value of the variable part)/the step of the variable part

must be smaller than 6000.

3.1.23.1.2 Network Diagram

Service Planning

Use the POTS card of the AN5006-20 to access 64 voice services based on the

H.248 protocol.

3-2 Version: B/1

Page 69: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

3 Configuring Voice Services

Network Diagram

Figure 3-1 Network Diagram for the H.248 Voice Service

The H.248 protocol separates the signaling from the RTP flow to access the users'

voice services. The signaling communicates with the softswitch platform of the

upper level directly, and the RTP flow is forwarded to the designated MG via the

media server.

Hardware Configuration

The equipment can access the voice services using the CASA, POTS32 or POTS

cards. In this example, a POTS card is used.

3.1.33.1.3 Planning Data

Table 3-1 Planning Data for the H.248 Voice Service

Item Description Example

Enabling the

POTS port

Slot No.Configure this item according to the actual

situations.4

Port No.Configure this item according to the actual

situations.1 to 64

Enable

When the voice service is configured, this

item must be set to Enable. Otherwise the

service cannot be accessed.

Enable

Version: B/1 3-3

Page 70: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

Table 3-1 Planning Data for the H.248 Voice Service (Continued)

Item Description Example

Configuring

the uplink

service VLAN

Service ID Read-only item. 1

Service Name

The user can enter numbers, letters and

underlines not exceeding 30 characters for

the subscriber service name.

ngn

Starting VLAN ID

The starting VLAN ID of the service. Value

range: 1 to 4095 (excluding 4088, 4089, and

4092). The starting VLAN ID should not be

larger than the ending VLAN ID.

200

Ending VLAN ID

The ending VLAN ID of the service. Value

range: 1 to 4095 (excluding 4088, 4089, and

4092). The starting VLAN ID should not be

larger than the ending VLAN ID.

200

Port No. / Trunk Group

ID

The port number of the service or the Trunk

group number.

If the uplink port has joined the Trunk group,

the system only displays the Trunk group

number, instead of the uplink port number.

GE1

Port Tag / Untaguntag indicates stripping the VLAN tag; tag

indicates keeping the VLAN tag.tag

Configuring

the voice

VLAN

VoIP Vlan Type

Read-only. The options include signal vlan

and RTP vlan. The signal vlan refers to the

VLAN tag carried by the voice signaling

flow, while the RTP vlan refers to the VLAN

tag carried by the voice flow.

signal vlan RTP vlan

Service NAME Unconfigurable. Null by default currently. -

Svlan TpidThe protocol identifier, ranging from 1 to

65534. The default setting is 33024.33024

Svlan Id

The SVLAN ID in the QinQ mode or the

VLAN ID in the single-tagged mode. The

VLAN ID should be within the uplink port

VLAN range. The value ranges from 1 to

4085, and should not be null.

200

Svlan CoS

The service VLAN priority level. The value

ranges from 0 to 7. 7 stands for the highest

priority level and 0 the lowest. The default

value is 7.

7

3-4 Version: B/1

Page 71: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

3 Configuring Voice Services

Table 3-1 Planning Data for the H.248 Voice Service (Continued)

Item Description Example

Cvlan Tpid

The protocol identifier, ranging from 1 to

65534. The default setting is 33024. Users

need not configure this item when single

VLAN is used.

33024

Cvlan Id

The CVLAN ID in the QinQ mode. Users

need not configure this item in the single-

VLAN mode.

10 20

Cvlan CoS

The user VLAN priority level. The value

ranges from 0 to 7. 7 is the highest priority

while 0 is the lowest. The default setting is 7.

Users need not configure this item when

single VLAN is used.

7

Configuring

Megaco /

MGCP

softswitch

platform

parameters

Primary MGCThe IP address or domain name of the

primary softswitch platform MGC.192.168.1.1

Primary MGC Port

The communication port of the primary

softswitch platform MGC. The value ranges

from 0 to 65535, and the default value is

2944.

2944

Secondary MGCThe IP address or domain name of the

secondary softswitch platform MGC.192.168.2.1

Secondary MGC Port

The communication port of the secondary

softswitch platform MGC. The value ranges

from 0 to 65535, and the default value is

2944.

2944

Keep Alive

Controls whether the ONU regularly sends

keep-alive messages to the softswitch

platform MGC. Options available are Enable

Initiative, Enable Passive and Disable.

Enable Initiative

Alive Interval (s)

The interval of sending the keep-alive

messages. The value ranges from 1 to

86400 (unit: s), and the default value is 30.

30

Alive Times

The maximum timeout times that the

softswitch platform MGC permits the ONU to

send the keep-alive messages; if the value

is exceeded, it is considered that the MGC

loses its communication with the ONU. The

value ranges from 1 to 120. The default

setting is 3.

3

Version: B/1 3-5

Page 72: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

Table 3-1 Planning Data for the H.248 Voice Service (Continued)

Item Description Example

Alive FormatThe options include Notify and Service

Change.Notify

Configuring

the voice IP

address

IP Config Mode Supports the static mode. static

Signal IP

The IP address and the subnet mask of the

management control card's CPU. The IP

address is used to communicate with the

MGC.

IPv4:192.168.1.101 /

255.255.255.0

Signal GatewayThe address of the signaling gateway, used

to forward the data of the MGC.IPv4:192.168.1.254

RTP IPThe IP address and the subnet mask of the

management control card's DSP

IPv4:192.168.2.101/

255.255.255.0

RTP Gateway

The address of the RTP gateway. This

gateway is used to forward the RTP flow

communicating with other MGs.

IPv4:192.168.2.254

Primary DNS

The IP address of the primary domain name

system. Users need configure the DNS only

when the domain name is used as the MGC

address. In this example, IP address is used

as the MGC address, so you need not

configure the DNS.

-

Second DNS

The IP address of the secondary domain

name system. Users need configure the

DNS only when the domain name is used as

the MGC address. In this example, IP

address is used as the MGC address, so

you need not configure the DNS.

-

PPPoE Operation

Controls the PPPoE DIP switch. The options

include dial and disconnect. The default

value is disconnect.

-

PPPoE Username The user name for PPPoE dialing. -

PPPoE Password The password for PPPoE dialing. -

PPPoE Authentication

The authentication mode of the PPPoE. The

options include PAP and CHAP. The default

setting is PAP.

-

DHCP Operation Enables or disables the DHCP function. -

DHCP Option60 Enable

Enables or disables the DHCP Option60

function, and controls whether to add the

terminal identifier.

-

3-6 Version: B/1

Page 73: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

3 Configuring Voice Services

Table 3-1 Planning Data for the H.248 Voice Service (Continued)

Item Description Example

DHCP Option60 BaseThe fixed part of the Option60 terminal

identifier.-

DHCP Option60 SuffixThe suffix value of the Option60 terminal

identifier.-

Configuring

basic voice

parameters

Domain Name

The domain name of the gateway. The

default setting is null; configured according

to actual conditions. If the Softswitch

platform requires registration in terms of

domain name, the user should apply for a

domain name for the equipment from the

Softswitch center.

When the domain name is null, the system

will use the following as domain name by

default: voice signaling IP address: local

protocol port number.

-

Local Protocol Port

The communication port of the softswitch

platform MGC. The value ranges from 0 to

65534, and the default value is 0.

2944

Protocol Encode Type

Select the text encoding type (compact

encode or uncompact encode). The

default value is uncompact encode.

uncompact encode

Transport Protocol TypeSelect the transmission layer protocol (TCP

or UDP). The default value is UDP.UDP

Configuring

the RTP

resource

profile

RTP Name Fixed Part

The fixed part of the RTP resource name. If

the RTP resource name is RTP/1000, the

fixed part should be RTP/. The default value

is RTP/.

RTP/

RTP Name Begin Value

The start value of the variable part of the

RTP resource name; the start value must be

smaller than the end value. The value

ranges from 0 to 65534, and the default

value is 4000.

4000

RTP Name End Value

The end value of the variable part of RTP

name. It must be larger than the start value

of the variable part. The value ranges from 0

to 65534, and the default value is 9000.

9000

RTP Name Step Value

The step of the variable part of RTP

resource name. The value ranges from 1 to

65534, and the default value is 1.

1

Version: B/1 3-7

Page 74: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

Table 3-1 Planning Data for the H.248 Voice Service (Continued)

Item Description Example

RTP Name Fill

Select whether to pad the bits following the

fixed part (RTP/) with zeros automatically to

fill the tetrad, for example, to pad RTP/0 to

RTP/0000. Configure according to the

actual condition. The default value: filled.

filled

Configuring

the voice port

Slot No.The number of the slot accommodating the

POTS card.4

Port No.The POTS card port physically connected

with the subscriber's phone.1 to 64

PHONEThe Termination ID corresponds to the port

for identifying the physical end point.B1 to B64

DSP Profile IDConfigure the DSP profile to be bound with

the port. The default value is Default.Default

3.1.43.1.4 Configuration Flow

The configuration flow to provision the voice service using the H.248 protocol is

shown in Figure 3-2.

3-8 Version: B/1

Page 75: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

3 Configuring Voice Services

Figure 3-2 Flow of H.248 Voice Service

3.1.53.1.5 Enabling the POTS Port

Enable ports 1 to 64 of the POTS card on the AN5006-20 according to the service

planning and demand. By doing so, the subscribers' voice services can be normally

accessed.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE

manager.

Version: B/1 3-9

Page 76: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to

bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common ConfigíPort ConfigíPort

Enable. Select the POTS card to be configured in the Select Object window

that appears, and then click OK to open the Port Enable tab.

4. Click the Batch Modify button, and select the line Enable in the Modify in a

batch manner dialog box.

5. Select Enable in the Initial list box, enter 0 in the Step text box, and enter 64 in

the Repeat text box, as shown in Figure 3-3.

Figure 3-3 Enabling Ports in a Batch Manner

6. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,

as shown in Figure 3-4.

3-10 Version: B/1

Page 77: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

3 Configuring Voice Services

Figure 3-4 Enabling the POTS Port (Completed)

3.1.63.1.6 Configuring the Uplink Service VLAN

Process the uplink VLAN tags via the AN5006-20's uplink port. The services are

distinguished by their VLAN IDs. The user services whose VLAN IDs are within the

set range will be transmitted to the upper level network by the OLTequipment

AN5116-06B. Vice versa.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE

manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to

bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Data ServiceíMCU Port Service VLAN

to open the MCU Port Service VLAN tab.

4. Click the Add button on the toolbar. In the Enter the number of rows to add

dialog box that appears, type 1 and click OK to add a service VLAN entry.

5. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

6. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,

as shown in Figure 3-5.

Version: B/1 3-11

Page 78: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

Figure 3-5 Configuring the Uplink Service VLAN

3.1.73.1.7 Configuring the Voice VLAN

Configure the parameters related to the voice service VLAN. Users can configure

the VLANs for the signaling service and the RTP flow respectively.

Precautions

u Users need only configure the service VLAN instead of the user VLAN when

single VLAN is applied in the network. However, if QinQ VLAN is applied in the

network, users need configure both the service VLAN and the user VLAN

according to the network planning.

u When configuring the voice VLAN, make sure the service name here is

consistent with the service name in the uplink port VLAN configuration.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE

manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to

bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select POTS ServiceíVoip Service VLAN to

open the Voip Service VLAN tab.

4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,

as shown in Figure 3-6.

Figure 3-6 Configuring the Voice VLAN

3-12 Version: B/1

Page 79: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

3 Configuring Voice Services

3.1.83.1.8 Configuring Megaco / MGCP Softswitch PlatformParameters

Configure the IP address of the MGC and the protocol port number of the NGN.

When the softswitch platform uses the H.248 protocol to control the access

terminals, you should set the MGC protocol type to H.248 for VoIP services, and the

protocol port No. to 2944.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE

manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to

bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select POTS ServiceíMEGACO/MGCP

ConfigíMegaco/MGCP SoftSwitch Config to bring up the Megaco/MGCP

SoftSwitch Config tab.

4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,

as shown in Figure 3-7.

Figure 3-7 Configuring Megaco / MGCP Softswitch Platform Parameters

3.1.93.1.9 Configuring the Voice IPAddress

When the signaling IP address configuration mode is static, users need configure

the signaling IP address, the signaling mask, the signaling gateway, the RTP IP

address, the RTP mask, and the RTP gateway.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE

manager.

Version: B/1 3-13

Page 80: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to

bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select POTS ServiceíVoice IP Config to open

the Voice IP Config tab.

4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,

as shown in Figure 3-8.

Figure 3-8 Configuring the Voice IPAddress

3.1.103.1.10 Configuring Basic Voice Parameters

Configure basic voice parameters, setting the transport protocol type to UDP, the

local protocol port to 2944, and the protocol encoding type to uncompacted

encoding.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE

manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to

bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select POTS ServiceíVoice Base Config to

open the Voice Base Config tab.

4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,

as shown in Figure 3-9.

Figure 3-9 Configuring Basic Voice Parameters

3-14 Version: B/1

Page 81: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

3 Configuring Voice Services

3.1.113.1.11 Configuring the RTP Resource Profile

Configure the parameters relating to the RTP resource profile, especially, set the

value in the RTP flow packet header in the H.248 protocol.

When configuring the step of the variable part of the RTP resource name, please

note that the value 0 cannot be used, and the value of (end value of the variable part

- the start value of the variable part)/the step of the variable part must be smaller

than 6000.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE

manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to

bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select POTS ServiceíMEGACO/MGCP

ConfigíMegaco RTP Config Profile to bring up the Megaco RTP Config

Profile tab.

4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,

as shown in Figure 3-10.

Figure 3-10 Configuring the RTP Resource Profile

3.1.123.1.12 Configuring the Voice Port

Configure parameters relevant to the voice port, and configure the port user name

and the DSP profile, so as to bind the port user name and the user port.

Version: B/1 3-15

Page 82: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE

manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to

bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select POTS ServiceíVoice Port Config to

open the Voice Port Config tab.

4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,

as shown in Figure 3-11.

Figure 3-11 Configuring the Voice Port

3.1.133.1.13 Configuration End

After completing the configuration of voice services based on the H.248 protocol,

check the equipment status as follows.

3.1.143.1.14 Checking the Voice Equipment Status

Check the registration status of the current ONU and MGC.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE

manager.

3-16 Version: B/1

Page 83: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

3 Configuring Voice Services

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to

bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Get InformationíVoice Informationí

Voice Device Status to access the Voice Device Status tab.

4. Click the Read from Device button on the toolbar to read the configuration

data from the equipment, as shown in Figure 3-12.

Figure 3-12 Checking the Voice Equipment Status

Result

The voice equipment has the following three statuses.

u registering

u register successful

u register failed. The failure may be caused by the inconsistency between the IP

configuration & user name configuration of the MGC / ONU and the local

planning data.

3.1.153.1.15 Viewing the Voice IPAddress Status

The following introduces how to view the status of the IP voice service and the

related parameters of the IAD module in the AN5006-20.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE

manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to

bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Get InformationíVoice Informationí

Voice IP Status to access the Voice IP Status tab.

4. Click the Read from Device button on the toolbar to read the configuration

data from the equipment, as shown in Figure 3-13.

Version: B/1 3-17

Page 84: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

Figure 3-13 Checking the Voice IPAddress Status

3.1.163.1.16 Checking the DSP Channel Status

Check the DSP timeslot channel status (busy or idle) and the timeslot occupancy.

One user port corresponds to one timeslot and occupies the timeslot when the user

port is busy.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE

manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to

bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Get InformationíVoice Informationí

DSP Channels Status to access the DSP Channels Status tab.

4. Click the Read from Device button on the toolbar to read the configuration

data from the equipment, as shown in Figure 3-14.

Figure 3-14 Checking the DSP Channel Status

Result

The DSP channel has the following two statuses.

u Busy: the user corresponding to the channel is in conversation.

3-18 Version: B/1

Page 85: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

3 Configuring Voice Services

u Idle: no endpoint user name is configured or the user is not in normal

conversation.

3.1.173.1.17 Checking the NGN User Port Status

Check the port status information of the current user.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE

manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to

bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. Select POTS ServiceíNGN User Port Status in the Operational Tree pane

to bring up the NGN User Port Status tab.

4. Click the Read from Device button on the toolbar to read the configuration

data from the equipment, as shown in Figure 3-15.

Figure 3-15 Checking the NGN User Port Status

Result

The user port has the following statuses:

u Registering

u Idle

u Off-hook

u Dialing

u Ringing

u Ring back tone

u Connecting

Version: B/1 3-19

Page 86: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

u Connected

u Release connection

u Register failed

u Unactivated

u Line fault

u Busy

3.23.2 Example of Configuring NGN Voice Service -SIP

The following gives an example to introduce how to configure the VoIP service using

the SIP protocol.

3.2.13.2.1 Configuration Rules

u When the softswitch platform uses the SIP protocol to control the access

terminal, select the protocol port 5060.

u It is recommended that users configure the signaling VLAN and the RTP VLAN

with the same VLAN IDs. If the signaling flow and the RTP flow have different

designated IP addresses, their VLAN IDs can be also different.

u The configuration items such as the SIP authentication user name, the SIP

authentication password, and the SIP subscriber call configuration profile ID

can be edited only when the SIP protocol is used in the system.

3.2.23.2.2 Network Diagram

Service Planning

Use the POTS card of the AN5006-20 to access 64 voice services based on the SIP.

3-20 Version: B/1

Page 87: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

3 Configuring Voice Services

Network Diagram

Figure 3-16 Network Diagram for the SIP Voice Service

The protocol SIP implements the voice services of users with the signaling and RTP

flow separated. The signaling communicates with the softswitch platform of the

upper level directly, and the RTP flow is forwarded to the designated MG via the

media server.

Hardware Configuration

The equipment can access the voice services using the CASA, POTS32 or POTS

cards. In this example, a POTS card is used.

3.2.33.2.3 Planning Data

Table 3-2 Planning Data for the SIP Voice Service

Item Description Example

Enabling the

POTS port

Slot No.Configure this item according to the

actual situations.4

Port No.Configure this item according to the

actual situations.1 to 64

Enable

When the voice service is configured,

this item must be set to Enable.

Otherwise the service cannot be

provisioned.

Enable

Configuring

the uplink

service VLAN

Service ID Read-only item. 1

Version: B/1 3-21

Page 88: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

Table 3-2 Planning Data for the SIP Voice Service (Continued)

Item Description Example

Service Name

The user can enter numbers, letters

and underlines not exceeding 30

characters for the subscriber service

name.

ngn

Starting VLAN ID

The starting VLAN ID of the service.

Value range: 1 to 4095 (excluding

4088, 4089, and 4092). The starting

VLAN ID should not be larger than the

ending VLAN ID.

600

Ending VLAN ID

The ending VLAN ID of the service.

Value range: 1 to 4095 (excluding

4088, 4089, and 4092). The starting

VLAN ID should not be larger than the

ending VLAN ID.

600

Port No. / Trunk Group ID

The port number of the service or the

Trunk group number.

If the uplink port has joined the Trunk

group, the system only displays the

Trunk group number, instead of the

uplink port number.

GE1

Port Tag / Untag

Untag indicates stripping the VLAN

tag; tag indicates keeping the VLAN

tag.

tag

Configuring

the voice

VLAN

VoIP VLAN Type

Read-only. The options include signal

vlan and RTP vlan. The signal vlan

refers to the VLAN tag carried by the

voice signaling flow, while the RTP

vlan refers to the VLAN tag carried by

the voice flow.

signal vlan RTP vlan

Service NAMEUnconfigurable. Null by default

currently.-

Svlan Tpid

The protocol identifier, ranging from 1

to 65534. The default setting is

33024.

33024

3-22 Version: B/1

Page 89: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

3 Configuring Voice Services

Table 3-2 Planning Data for the SIP Voice Service (Continued)

Item Description Example

Svlan Id

The SVLAN ID in the QinQ mode or

the VLAN ID in the single-tagged

mode. The VLAN ID should be within

the uplink port VLAN range. The value

ranges from 1 to 4095, and should not

be null.

600

Svlan CoS

The service VLAN priority level. The

value ranges from 0 to 7. 7 stands for

the highest priority level and 0 the

lowest. The default value is 7.

7

Cvlan Tpid

The protocol identifier, ranging from 1

to 65534. The default setting is

33024. Users need not configure this

item when single VLAN is used.

33024

Cvlan Id

The CVLAN ID in the QinQ mode.

Users need not configure this item in

the single-VLAN mode.

60 70

Cvlan CoS

The user VLAN priority level. The

value ranges from 0 to 7. 7 is the

highest priority while 0 is the lowest.

The default setting is 7. Users need

not configure this item when single

VLAN is used.

7

Configuring

the SIP server

SipProxySerAddrThe IP address or domain name of

the active SIP proxy server.192.168.5.101

SipProxyPort

The port number of the active SIP

proxy server. The default setting is

5060.

5060

BackupSipProxySer-

vAddr

The IP address or domain name of

the standby SIP proxy server.

Configure this item according to the

planning data.

192.168.6.101

BackupSipProxyPort

The port number of the standby SIP

proxy server. The default setting is

5060.

5060

SipRegisterAddrThe IP address or domain name of

the active SIP registrar.192.168.5.101

SipRegisterPortThe port number of the active SIP

registrar. The default setting is 5060.5060

Version: B/1 3-23

Page 90: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

Table 3-2 Planning Data for the SIP Voice Service (Continued)

Item Description Example

BackupSipRegisterAddrThe IP address or domain name of

the standby SIP registrar.192.168.6.101

BackupSipRegisterPortThe port number of the standby SIP

registrar. The default setting is 5060.5060

Sip Register Interval (s)

After being registered on the SIP

server, an ONU needs to send the

register messages to the SIP server

periodically. That is, in the register

refresh period, the ONU needs to

send the register information to the

SIP server to keep the validity of its

registration on the SIP server.

The value ranges from 60 to 3600; the

unit is second; and the default value is

3600.

3600

Keep Alive

Controls whether the ONU regularly

sends keep-alive messages to the

softswitch platform MGC. Options

available are Initiative, Passive and

Disable.

Initiative

Alive Interval (s)

The interval of sending the keep-alive

messages. The value ranges from 1

to 43200 (unit: s), and the default

value is 30.

30

Alive Times

The maximum timeout times that the

softswitch platform MGC permits the

ONU to send the keep-alive

messages; if the value is exceeded, it

is considered that the MGC loses its

communication with the ONU. The

value ranges from 1 to 120. The

default setting is 3.

3

Alive ModeThe options include By Device and

By Port.By Device

Configuring

the voice IP

address

IP Config Mode Supports the static mode. static

Signal IP

The IP address and the subnet mask

of the management control card's

CPU. The IP address is used to

communicate with the MGC.

IPv4:192.168.1.101 /

255.255.255.0

3-24 Version: B/1

Page 91: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

3 Configuring Voice Services

Table 3-2 Planning Data for the SIP Voice Service (Continued)

Item Description Example

Signal GatewayThe address of the signaling gateway,

used to forward the data of the MGC.IPv4:192.168.1.254

RTP IPThe IP address of the management

control card's DSP.

IPv4:192.168.2.101 /

255.255.255.0

RTP Gateway

The address of the RTP gateway.

This gateway is used to forward the

RTP flow communicating with other

MGs.

IPv4:192.168.2.254

Primary DNS

The IP address of the primary domain

name system. The DNS needs

configuration only when the MGC

configuration uses the domain name.

In this example, IP address is used as

the MGC address, so you need not

configure the DNS.

-

Second DNS

The IP address of the secondary

domain name system. Users need

configure the DNS only when the

domain name is used as the MGC

address. In this example, IP address

is used as the MGC address, so you

need not configure the DNS.

-

PPPoE Operation

Controls the PPPoE DIP switch. The

options include dial and disconnect.

The default value is disconnect.

-

PPPoE Username The user name for PPPoE dialing. -

PPPoE Password The password for PPPoE dialing. -

PPPoE Authentication

The authentication mode of the

PPPoE. The options include PAP and

CHAP. The default setting is PAP.

-

DHCP OperationEnables or disables the DHCP

function.-

DHCP Option60 Enable

Enables or disables the DHCP

Option60 function, and controls

whether to add the terminal identifier.

-

DHCP Option60 BaseThe fixed part of the Option60

terminal identifier.-

DHCP Option60 SuffixThe suffix value of the Option60

terminal identifier.-

Version: B/1 3-25

Page 92: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

Table 3-2 Planning Data for the SIP Voice Service (Continued)

Item Description Example

Configuring

basic voice

parameters

Domain Name

The domain name of the gateway.

The default setting is null; configured

according to actual conditions. If the

Softswitch platform requires

registration in terms of domain name,

the user should apply for a domain

name for the equipment from the

Softswitch center.

When the domain name is null, the

system will use the following as

domain name by default: voice

signaling IP address: local protocol

port number.

-

Local Protocol Port

The communication port of the

softswitch platform MGC. The value

ranges from 0 to 65534, and the

default value is 0.

5060

Protocol Encode Type

Select the text encoding type

(compact encode or uncompact

encode). The default setting is

uncompact encode.

uncompact encode

Transport Protocol Type

Select the transmission layer protocol

(TCPor UDP). UDPis selected by

default.

UDP

Configuring

SIP digitmapSIP digitmap

The digitmap is mainly used by the

MG to determine whether all dial-ups

have been collected. The SIP protocol

does not define the digitmap, and

most of the terminals use the method

of dialing # first and then reporting the

number. The configuration of the

digitmap can omit the step of dialing

#.

Configure this item according to the

practical project requirements.

[0-9ABCD].|[EF][0-9ABCDEF].

Configuring

the voice port

Slot No.The number of the slot

accommodating the POTS card.4

Port No.

The POTS card port physically

connected with the subscriber's

phone.

1 to 64

3-26 Version: B/1

Page 93: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

3 Configuring Voice Services

Table 3-2 Planning Data for the SIP Voice Service (Continued)

Item Description Example

PHONE

The actual telephone number of a

certain port on the ONU. Its value

must be unique.

88881101 to 88881164

DSP Profile ID

The name of the DSP profile bound

with the SIP user telephone number.

The default setting is Default.

Default

SIPUSER

The user name for authenticating a

certain port of the ONU on the SIP

register sever. When the protocol type

is H.248 or MGCP, users need not

configure this item.

88881101 to 88881164

SIPPASSWD

The password for authenticating a

certain port of the ONU on the SIP

register sever. When the protocol type

is H.248 or MGCP, users need not

configure this item.

test

SIP User Call Config

Profile ID

Some functions of the ONU will be

enabled or disabled based on the

profile settings after the ONU is bound

to the profile.

Default

3.2.43.2.4 Configuration Flow

The configuration flow to provision the voice service using the SIP protocol is shown

in Figure 3-17.

Version: B/1 3-27

Page 94: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

Figure 3-17 Flow of SIP Voice Service

3.2.53.2.5 Enabling the POTS Port

Enable ports 1 to 64 of the POTS card on the AN5006-20 according to the service

planning and demand. By doing so, the subscribers' voice services can be normally

accessed.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE

manager.

3-28 Version: B/1

Page 95: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

3 Configuring Voice Services

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to

bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common ConfigíPort ConfigíPort

Enable. Select the POTS card to be configured in the Select Object window

that appears, and then click OK.

4. Click the Batch Modify button, and select the line Enable in the Modify in a

batch manner dialog box.

5. Select Enable in the Initial list box, enter 0 in the Step text box, and enter 64 in

the Repeat text box, as shown in Figure 3-18.

Figure 3-18 Enabling Ports in a Batch Manner

6. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,

as shown in Figure 3-19.

Version: B/1 3-29

Page 96: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

Figure 3-19 Enabling the POTS Port (Completed)

3.2.63.2.6 Configuring the Uplink Service VLAN

Process the uplink VLAN tags via the AN5006-20's uplink port. The services are

distinguished by their VLAN IDs. The user services whose VLAN IDs are within the

set range will be transmitted to the upper level network by the OLTequipment

AN5116-06B. Vice versa.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE

manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to

bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Data ServiceíMCU Port Service VLAN

to open the MCU Port Service VLAN tab.

4. Click the Add button on the toolbar. In the Enter the number of rows to add

dialog box that appears, type 1 and click OK to add a service VLAN entry.

5. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

6. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,

as shown in Figure 3-20.

3-30 Version: B/1

Page 97: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

3 Configuring Voice Services

Figure 3-20 Configuring the Uplink Service VLAN

3.2.73.2.7 Configuring the Voice VLAN

Configure the parameters related to the voice service VLAN. Users can configure

the VLANs for the signaling service and the RTP flow respectively.

Precautions

u It is recommended that users configure the signaling VLAN and the RTP VLAN

with the same VLAN IDs. If the signaling flow and the RTP flow have different

designated IP addresses, their VLAN IDs can be also different.

u Users need only configure the service VLAN instead of the user VLAN when

single VLAN is applied in the network. However, if QinQ VLAN is applied in the

network, users need configure both the service VLAN and the user VLAN

according to the network planning.

u When configuring the the VoIP voice service VLAN, make sure the service

VLAN ID is within the range of the uplink port VLAN IDs, and the uplink port

VLAN ID is within the range of the OLT local VLAN IDs.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE

manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to

bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select POTS ServiceíVoip Service VLAN to

open the Voip Service VLAN tab.

4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,

as shown in Figure 3-21.

Version: B/1 3-31

Page 98: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

Figure 3-21 Configuring the Voice VLAN

3.2.83.2.8 Configuring the SIP Server

Configure the related parameters of the SIP server. The SIP server includes the

register server and proxy server.

u As a network logical entity, the proxy server can represent the client end to

forward or respond to a request. That is, it can serves as the client end and the

server at the same time. Its main functions include routing, calling control,

service providing, AAA (Authentication, Authorization and Accounting), and so

on.

u The register server accepts the ONU register request, and then saves and

processes the related information of the ONU register.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE

manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to

bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select POTS ServiceíSIP ConfigíSIP

Server Config to open the SIP Server Config tab.

4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,

as shown in Figure 3-22.

Figure 3-22 Configuring the SIP Server

3-32 Version: B/1

Page 99: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

3 Configuring Voice Services

3.2.93.2.9 Configuring the Voice IPAddress

When the signaling IP address configuration mode is static, users need configure

the signaling IP address, the signaling mask, the signaling gateway, the RTP IP

address, the RTP mask, and the RTP gateway.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE

manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to

bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select POTS ServiceíVoice IP Config to open

the Voice IP Config tab.

4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,

as shown in Figure 3-23.

Figure 3-23 Configuring the Voice IPAddress

3.2.103.2.10 Configuring Basic Voice Parameters

Configure basic voice parameters, setting the transport protocol type to UDP, the

local protocol port to 5060, and the protocol encoding type to compacted encoding.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE

manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to

bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select POTS ServiceíVoice Base Config to

open the Voice Base Config tab.

4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

Version: B/1 3-33

Page 100: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,

as shown in Figure 3-24.

Figure 3-24 Configuring Basic Voice Parameters

3.2.113.2.11 Configuring the SIP Digitmap

The digitmap is mainly used by the MG to determine whether all dial-ups have been

collected. The SIP protocol does not define the digitmap, and most of the terminals

use the method of dialing # first and then reporting the number. The configuration of

the digitmap can omit the step of dialing #.

After configuring the digitmap of the SIP protocol, when the user dials, the number

should match the dialing scheme in the digitmap and then be reported to the

softswitch platform only when a match is found. The SIP digitmap function is

optional and can be configured when required by the operator.

Note:

Users should configure the SIP digitmap according to practical conditions,

so as to enable quick match of telephone numbers.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE

manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to

bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select POTS ServiceíSIP ConfigíSIP

digitmap to open the SIP digitmap tab.

4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,

as shown in Figure 3-25.

3-34 Version: B/1

Page 101: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

3 Configuring Voice Services

Figure 3-25 Configuring the SIP Digitmap

3.2.123.2.12 Configuring the Voice Port

Configure parameters relevant to the voice port, and configure the port user name

and the DSP profile, so as to bind the port user name and the user port.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE

manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to

bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select POTS ServiceíVoice Port Config to

open the Voice Port Config tab.

4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,

as shown in Figure 3-26.

Figure 3-26 Configuring the Voice Port

Version: B/1 3-35

Page 102: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

3.2.133.2.13 Configuration End

After completing the configuration of voice services based on the SIP protocol,

check the equipment status as follows.

3.2.143.2.14 Checking the Voice Equipment Status

Check the registration status of the ONU and MGC.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE

manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to

bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Get InformationíVoice Informationí

Voice Device Status to access the Voice Device Status tab.

4. Click the Read from Device button on the toolbar to read the configuration

data from the equipment, as shown in Figure 3-27.

Figure 3-27 Checking the Voice Equipment Status

Result

The voice equipment has the following three statuses.

u registering

u register successful

u register failed. The failure may be caused by the inconsistency between the IP

configuration & user name configuration of the MGC / ONU and the local

planning data.

3-36 Version: B/1

Page 103: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

3 Configuring Voice Services

3.2.153.2.15 Viewing the Voice IPAddress Status

The following introduces how to view the status of the IP voice service and the

related parameters of the IAD module in the AN5006-20.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE

manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to

bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Get InformationíVoice Informationí

Voice IP Status to access the Voice IP Status tab.

4. Click the Read from Device button on the toolbar to read the configuration

data from the equipment, as shown in Figure 3-28.

Figure 3-28 Checking the Voice IPAddress Status

3.2.163.2.16 Checking the DSP Channel Status

Check the DSP timeslot channel status (busy or idle) and the timeslot occupancy.

One user port corresponds to one timeslot and occupies the timeslot when the user

port is busy.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE

manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to

bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Get InformationíVoice Informationí

DSP Channels Status to access the DSP Channels Status tab.

4. Click the Read from Device button on the toolbar to read the configuration

data from the equipment, as shown in Figure 3-29.

Version: B/1 3-37

Page 104: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

Figure 3-29 Checking the DSP Channel Status

Result

The DSP channel has the following two statuses.

u Busy: the user corresponding to the channel is in conversation.

u Idle: no endpoint user name is configured or the user is not in normal

conversation.

3.2.173.2.17 Checking the NGN User Port Status

Check the port status information of the current user.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE

manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to

bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. Select POTS ServiceíNGN User Port Status in the Operational Tree pane

to bring up the NGN User Port Status tab.

4. Click the Read from Device button on the toolbar to read the configuration

data from the equipment, as shown in Figure 3-30.

3-38 Version: B/1

Page 105: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

3 Configuring Voice Services

Figure 3-30 Checking the NGN User Port Status

Result

The user port has the following statuses:

u Registering

u Idle

u Off-hook

u Dialing

u Ringing

u Ring back tone

u Connecting

u Connected

u Release connection

u Register failed

u Unactivated

u Line fault

u Busy

3.33.3 Example of Configuring PSTN Voice Service

The following introduces how to configure the PSTN voice service.

Version: B/1 3-39

Page 106: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

3.3.13.3.1 Configuration Rule

The AN5006-20 provides four E1 links in total. Each link provides 32 timeslots: the

timeslot 0 acts as the frame header, the timeslot 16 acts as the signaling timeslot (C

channel), and the others are used for transmitting the PSTN voice service. When a

user goes off-hook and uses the PSTN voice service, the remote node to be

connected (taking AN3300-C1 as an example) distributes one timeslot of E1 as the

voice channel. The voice service can be accessed via the cross-connect between

the timeslot and the user port.

u Only the MCUA card of the AN5006-20 supports the PSTN voice service.

u The AN5006-20 supports up to four POTS or CASA cards. When using four

POTS cards, the can implement access of up to 256 PSTN voice users; when

using four CASA cards, the can implement access of up to 128 PSTN voice

users.

u The communication between the AN5006-20 and the AN3300-C1 requires the

timeslot 16 of at least one E1 link as the C channel. If multiple C channel

switches of E1 links are enabled, the AN5006-20 will select the timeslot 16 of

the first E1 link as the active C channel and the timeslots 16 of other E1 links as

the standby C channel.

For example, the AN5006-20 is connected with the AN3300-C1 via the 2nd and

3rd E1 link and the two E1 links enable the C channel. The AN5006-20 will

select the timeslot 16 of the 2nd E1 link as the active C channel and the

timeslot 16 of the 3rd E1 link as the standby C channel. If the second E1 link is

faulty, the AN5006-20 will automatically select the timeslot 16 of the 3rd E1 link

as the active C channel.

u The AN5006-20's active / standby clock configuration can be acquired from the

E1 link of the connected AN3300-C1.

u The AN5006-20's E1 data configuration and C channel configuration should be

consistent with the AN3300-C1.

u The AN5006-20's remote node name is the local node name of the AN3300-C1.

The local node name of the AN5006-20 will be displayed in the node data table

of the AN3300-C1.

3-40 Version: B/1

Page 107: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

3 Configuring Voice Services

u The user ID of the V5 PSTN user data configuration of the AN5006-20 is used

for user identification for the AN3300-C1, and should be consistent with the V5

user data configuration of the AN3300-C1.

3.3.23.3.2 Network Diagram

Service Planning

Use the POTS card of the AN5006-20 to access 64 PSTN voice services.

Network Diagram

Figure 3-31 Network of PSTN Voice Services

The AN5006-20 accesses the users' PSTN voice service data via the POTS

interface card and transmits the data to the management control card for processing.

After that, the data are sent to the AN3300-C1 via the E1 uplink interface of the

management control card, and the AN3300-C1 uplinks the data to the V5 switch, so

that the POTS users can access the PSTN network.

Hardware Configuration

Use the MCUA card as the management control card, and the CASA card, the

POTS32 card and the POTS card as the service cards to access voice services. In

the example given below, one POTS card is used.

Version: B/1 3-41

Page 108: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

3.3.33.3.3 Planning Data

In the example, the AN3300-C1 is uplinked to the V5 switch via the 1st to 4th E1

links and downlinked to one AN5006-20 via the 5th to 8th E1 links. The AN5006-20

has 100 POTS subscribers.

Table 3-3 Planning Data of the PSTN Voice Service on the AN3300-C1 Side

Item Description Example

Configuring

the Local Node

Name

Local node

name

Configure the local node name of the

AN3300-C1 according to the operator's

network planning.

fiber

Configuring E1

Data

E1 No.Configure this item according to the E1

serial number that is actually used.1 to 4 5 to 8

Switch Enables the connected E1 interface. Enable

Framemode

Select non-frame mode, CRC multiframe

mode or framing mode according to the

operator's network planning.

CRC multiframe framemode

ImpedanceSelect the E1 interface impedance that

is actually used.75©

LinkID

Configure the E1 link ID connected with

the V5 switch according to the operator's

network planning.

0 to 3 -

Configuring

Clock Data

Main Clock

Mode

Sets the acquirement mode of the active

clock.Extracts from the 1st E1

Backup Clock

Mode

Sets the acquirement mode of the

standby clock.Extracts from the 2nd E1

V5 Config

V5 serialThe V5 serial number will be

automatically generated.1

V5 NameConfigure this item according to the

operator’s network planning.fiberv5

V5 type

Select the protocol type supported by

the V5 interface according to the

network planning of the operator.

V5.2

V5 ID

Configure the V5 interface ID for switch

identification according to the network

planning of the operator.

2

V5 variant

Configure the V5 interface variable

according to the network planning of the

operator.

0

3-42 Version: B/1

Page 109: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

3 Configuring Voice Services

Table 3-3 Planning Data of the PSTN Voice Service on the AN3300-C1 Side (Continued)

Item Description Example

E1 list

Configure the E1 serial number

connected with the V5 switch according

to the operator's network planning.

1 to 4

C Channel

Config

E1 No.

Configure the E1 serial number to be the

C channel according to the operator's

network planning.

1 2 5 6

Timeslot

Select the timeslot 16 as the C channel

according to the network planning of the

operator.

16

Channel type

Select C channel type according to the

network planning of the operator.

Select the working and protection C

channels for the uplink (the type of the

working channel is Active, and the type

of the protection channel is aux).

The downlink C channel is the node

communication channel.

Active auxNode-C

Channel

Cpath ID

Configure the active C channel identifier

according to the network planning of the

operator.

1 - -

protocol

Select C channel signaling protocol

according to the network planning of the

operator.

Ctrl Bcc Link ctrl

Protect Pstn isdn-

Configuring

Node Data

Node nameThe name of the local node connected

with the AN5006-20.aa

E1 listThe serial number of E1 actually

connected with the AN5006-20.5 to 8

Configuring

the V5 PSTN

User Data

V5 NameSelect the V5 interface name according

to the network planning of the operator.fiberv5

Start Protocol

Address

Configure the starting value of the L3

address distributed by the V5 switch

according to the operator's network

planning.

1

Relative node

Configure the local node name of the

AN5006-20 according to the operator's

network planning.

aa

Start User ID

Configure the starting value of the user

ID bound with the L3 address according

to the operator's network planning.

1

Version: B/1 3-43

Page 110: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

Table 3-3 Planning Data of the PSTN Voice Service on the AN3300-C1 Side (Continued)

Item Description Example

user number

Configure accessed POTS user quantity

according to the network planning of the

operator.

100

Table 3-4 Planning Data of the PSTN Voice Service on the AN5006-20 Side

Item Description Example

Configuring

the Local

Node Data

Local node name

Configure the local node name of

the AN5006-20 according to the

operator's network planning.

aa

Configuring

E1 Data

E1 Port No.

Configure this item according to

the E1 serial number that is

actually used.

1 2 3 4

SwitchEnables the connected E1

interface.Enable

Frame mode

Configure this item according to

the network planning of the

operator. This item should be

consistent with the AN3300-C1.

framemode

Impedance

Configure this item according to

the network planning of the

operator. This item should be

consistent with the AN3300-C1.

75©

Cchannel Switch

Select the timeslot 16 as the C

channel according to the network

planning of the operator.

Enable Enable Disable Disable

Configuring

Clock

Main Clock ModeSets the acquirement mode of the

active clock.Extracts from the 1st E1

Backup Clock

Mode

Sets the acquirement mode of the

standby clock.Extracts from the 2nd E1

Remote Node

Name Config

Remote Node

Name

Configure the local node name of

the AN3300-C1 according to the

operator's network planning.

fiber

E1-1 to E1-4The serial number of E1 actually

connected with the AN3300-C1.E1-1 to E1-4

Configuring

the V5 PSTN

User Data

Slot No.

Select the POTS card interface

that is actually used according to

the operator's network planning.

3 4

3-44 Version: B/1

Page 111: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

3 Configuring Voice Services

Table 3-4 Planning Data of the PSTN Voice Service on the AN5006-20 Side (Continued)

Item Description Example

Port No.

Select the POTS card interface

that is actually used according to

the operator's network planning.

1 to 64 1 to 36

Remote Node

Name

Configure the local node name of

the AN3300-C1 according to the

operator's network planning.

fiber

User ID

Configure the user ID bound with

the L3 address according to the

operator's network planning.

1 to 64 65 to 100

Version: B/1 3-45

Page 112: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

3.3.43.3.4 Configuration Flow

Figure 3-32 Flow of Configuring PSTN Voice Service

3.3.53.3.5 Configuring the PSTN Voice Service on the AN3300-C1

The following introduces the steps and methods of configuring the PSTN voice

service on the AN3300-C1.

3-46 Version: B/1

Page 113: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

3 Configuring Voice Services

3.3.5.13.3.5.1 Configuring the Local Node Name

When the AN3300-C1 serves as the remote node of the AN5006-20, set the local

node name for easy identification by the AN5006-20.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE AN3300-C1 in Main Topology to bring up the NE

manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to

bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. Select POTS ServiceíV5 Voice Service ConfigíV5 Service Config in the

Operational Tree pane, and select the Local Node Name Config tab.

4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,

as shown in Figure 3-33.

Figure 3-33 Configuring the Local Node Name

3.3.5.23.3.5.2 Configuring E1 Data

Configure basic parameters of the uplink and downlink E1 links of the AN3300-C1.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE AN3300-C1 in Main Topology to bring up the NE

manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to

bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. Select POTS ConfigíV5 Voice Service ConfigíV5 Service Config in the

Operational Tree pane, and then select the E1 Config tab.

4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

Version: B/1 3-47

Page 114: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,

as shown in Figure 3-34.

Figure 3-34 Configuring E1 Data (the AN3300-C1 Side)

3.3.5.33.3.5.3 Configuring Clock Data

Configure the way of acquiring the active and standby clocks for the AN3300-C1.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE AN3300-C1 in Main Topology to bring up the NE

manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to

bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. Select POTS ConfigíV5 Voice Service ConfigíV5 Service Config in the

Operational Tree pane, and then select the Clock Config tab.

4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,

as shown in Figure 3-35.

Figure 3-35 Configuring Clock Data

3.3.5.43.3.5.4 Configuring V5 Data

Configure the AN3300-C1's V5 parameters that match the V5 switch.

3-48 Version: B/1

Page 115: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

3 Configuring Voice Services

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE AN3300-C1 in Main Topology to bring up the NE

manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to

bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. Select POTS ConfigíV5 Voice Service ConfigíV5 Service Config in the

Operational Tree pane, and then select the V5 Config tab.

4. Click Add on the toolbar, and type 1 in the Enter the number of rows to add

dialog box that appears. Then click OK to add a V5 data configuration entry.

5. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

6. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,

as shown in Figure 3-36.

Figure 3-36 Configuring V5 Data

3.3.5.53.3.5.5 Configuring Channel C

Configure parameters of the C channel that connects the AN3300-C1 with the V5

switch and the AN5006-20.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE AN3300-C1 in Main Topology to bring up the NE

manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to

bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. Select POTS ConfigíV5 Voice Service ConfigíV5 Service Config in the

Operational Tree pane, and then select the C Channel Config tab.

4. Click Add on the toolbar, and type 4 in the Enter the number of rows to add

dialog box that appears. Then click OK to add four Channel C configuration

entries.

5. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

Version: B/1 3-49

Page 116: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

6. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,

as shown in Figure 3-37.

Figure 3-37 Configuring C Channel Data

3.3.5.63.3.5.6 Configuring Node Data

Configure parameters of the node connected with the AN3300-C1 downlink.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE AN3300-C1 in Main Topology to bring up the NE

manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to

bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. Select POTS ConfigíV5 Voice Service ConfigíV5 Service Config in the

Operational Tree pane, and then select the Node Config tab.

4. Click Add on the toolbar, and type 1 in the Enter the number of rows to add

dialog box that appears. Then click OK to add a node data configuration entry.

5. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

6. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,

as shown in Figure 3-38.

Figure 3-38 Configuring Node Data

3.3.5.73.3.5.7 Configuring the V5 PSTN User Data

Configure user parameters of the node connected with the AN3300-C1 downlink.

3-50 Version: B/1

Page 117: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

3 Configuring Voice Services

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE AN3300-C1 in Main Topology to bring up the NE

manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to

bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. Select POTS ConfigíV5 Voice Service ConfigíV5 Service Config in the

Operational Tree pane, and then select the V5 PSTN User Config tab.

4. Click Add on the toolbar, and type 1 in the Enter the number of rows to add

dialog box that appears. Then click OK to add a V5 PSTN user data

configuration entry.

5. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

6. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,

as shown in Figure 3-39.

Figure 3-39 Configuring the V5 PSTN User Data (the AN3300-C1 Side)

3.3.5.83.3.5.8 Saving Current Configuration to Flash

Save the current configuration data to the AN3300-C1's Flash, so as to avoid loss of

the equipment configuration data as a result of power failure.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE

manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to

bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select System ControlíSave Config to Flash

to bring up the Issue the command alert box, as shown in Figure 3-40.

Version: B/1 3-51

Page 118: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

Figure 3-40 Saving Current Configuration to Flash (at the AN3300-C1 Side)

4. Click OK to start saving the configuration data to Flash.

5. After the data saving is completed, click the Close button.

3.3.63.3.6 Configuring the PSTN Voice Service on the AN5006-20

The following introduces the steps and methods of configuring the PSTN voice

service on the AN5006-20.

3.3.6.13.3.6.1 Configuring the Local Node Data

Configure the local node name of the AN5006-20 for identifying the remote node

(the AN3300-C1).

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE

manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to

bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3-52 Version: B/1

Page 119: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

3 Configuring Voice Services

3. Select POTS ConfigíV5 Voice Service ConfigíLocal Node Name

Configuration in the Operational Tree pane to bring up the Local Node

Name Configuration tab.

4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,

as shown in Figure 3-41.

Figure 3-41 Configuring the Local Node Data

3.3.6.23.3.6.2 Configuring E1 Data

Configure the E1 link of the AN5006-20 for connection with the AN3300-C1.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE

manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to

bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. Select POTS ConfigíV5 Voice Service ConfigíE1 Configuration in the

Operational Tree pane to bring up the E1 Configuration tab.

4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,

as shown in Figure 3-42.

Figure 3-42 Configuring E1 Data (the AN5006-20 Side)

Version: B/1 3-53

Page 120: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

3.3.6.33.3.6.3 Configuring Clock

Configure the way of acquiring the active and standby clocks for the AN5006-20.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE

manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to

bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. Select POTS ConfigíV5 Voice Service ConfigíClock Configuration in the

Operational Tree pane to bring up the Clock Configuration tab.

4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,

as shown in Figure 3-43.

Figure 3-43 Configuring Clock

3.3.6.43.3.6.4 Configuring the Remote Node Data

Configure the data for the remote node (the AN3300-C1) connected with the

AN5006-20.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE

manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to

bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. Select POTS ConfigíV5 Voice Service ConfigíRemote Node Data

Configuration in the Operational Tree pane to bring up the Remote Node

Data Configuration tab.

3-54 Version: B/1

Page 121: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

3 Configuring Voice Services

4. Click Add on the toolbar, and type 1 in the Enter the number of rows to add

dialog box that appears. Then click OK to add a remote node data configuration

entry.

5. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

6. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,

as shown in Figure 3-44.

Figure 3-44 Configuring the Remote Node Data

3.3.6.53.3.6.5 Configuring the V5 PSTN User Data

Configure the V5 PSTN user data of the AN5006-20.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE

manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to

bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. Select POTS ConfigíV5 Voice Service ConfigíV5 PSTN User

Configuration in the Operational Tree pane to bring up the V5 PSTN User

Configuration tab.

4. In the Switch Object pane, select the ports 1 to 64 of the POTS card in Slot 3

and the port 1 to 36 of the POTS card in Slot 4.

5. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

6. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,

as shown in Figure 3-45.

Version: B/1 3-55

Page 122: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

Figure 3-45 Configuring the V5 PSTN User Data (the AN5006-20 Side)

3.3.6.63.3.6.6 Saving Current Configuration to Flash

Save configuration to the AN5006-20's Flash, so as to avoid the AN5006-20

configuration data loss caused by power failure.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE

manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to

bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select System ControlíSave Config to Flash

to bring up the Issue the command alert box, as shown in Figure 3-46.

3-56 Version: B/1

Page 123: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

3 Configuring Voice Services

Figure 3-46 Saving Current Configuration to Flash (at the AN5006-20 Side)

4. Click OK to start saving the configuration data to Flash.

5. After the data saving is completed, click the Close button.

3.3.73.3.7 Configuration Result

After completing the configuration of PSTN voice services, check the equipment

status as follows.

3.3.7.13.3.7.1 Checking E1 Status

Check the E1 link status of the AN5006-20 to check whether the E1 configuration is

successful.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE

manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to

bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. Select Get InformationíV5 Voice Get InformationíE1 Status in the

Operational Tree pane to bring up the E1 Status tab.

Version: B/1 3-57

Page 124: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

4. Click Read from Device on the toolbar, and the Link Status of the four E1

links will display Normal, which suggests correct configuration of the E1 links.

However, if other statuses are displayed, check for any errors in the

configuration. The normal display is as shown in Figure 3-47.

Figure 3-47 Checking E1 Status

3.3.7.23.3.7.2 Checking Node Status

Check the node status of the AN5006-20 and whether the node data configuration is

successful.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE

manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to

bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. Select Get InformationíV5 Voice Get InformationíNode Status in the

Operational Tree pane to bring up the Node Status tab.

4. Click Read from Device on the toolbar. If the connections between the four E1

links and the node are displayed as Normal and the sequence number of the

signaling E1 is not 0, the node configuration is correct; otherwise, check for any

error in the configuration. The status is shown in Figure 3-48.

Figure 3-48 Checking Node Status

3-58 Version: B/1

Page 125: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

3 Configuring Voice Services

3.43.4 Common Configuration

The following introduces the common configurations items for voice services.

3.4.13.4.1 Configuring POTS Common Parameters

Configure the related parameters of the POTS card, mainly include user dialing,

accounting, off-hook / onhook and voice parameters. The pulse duration should be

set less than the FLASH duration.

Note:

The following introduces the access method for configuring the POTS

common parameters on the network management system, applicable for

the MCUB, MCUC, MCUD, MCU-EPON, MCU-EPON2, MCU-GPON and

MCU-GPON2 cards.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE

manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to

bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select POTS ServiceíPOTS General

Parameter to bring up the POTS General Parameter tab.

4. Configure according to the default values.

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,

as shown in Figure 3-49.

Figure 3-49 Configuring POTS Common Parameters

Version: B/1 3-59

Page 126: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

3.4.23.4.2 Configuring the Voice Timer

Set the related parameters of the digitmap to control the report time of the number

that subscribers dial. The start timer is only applicable to the H.248 protocol, while

the maximum wait time, long timer, short timer and digitmap notify are applicable to

the H.248 and SIP protocols.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE

manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to

bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select POTS ServiceíVoice Timer to open the

Voice Timer tab.

4. Configure according to the default values.

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,

as shown in Figure 3-50.

Figure 3-50 Configuring the Voice Timer

3.4.33.4.3 Configuring the DSP Profile

Configure the parameters related to DSP speech encoding, including speech

encoding mode, voice quality, volume, DTMF, and so on. The Default profile cannot

be modified or deleted.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE

manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to

bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3-60 Version: B/1

Page 127: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

3 Configuring Voice Services

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select POTS ServiceíDSP Configuration

Profile to bring up the DSP Configuration Profile tab.

4. Configure according to the default values.

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,

as shown in Figure 3-51.

Figure 3-51 Configuring the DSP Profile

3.4.43.4.4 Configuring Fax Parameters

Configure the related parameters of fax, including the mode, coding mode, fax

report function and packet transmission / receiving time interval used by fax. The

item VBD Enable can only be configured when the fax mode is set to T30

Transparent.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE

manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to

bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select POTS ServiceíFax Parameter to bring

up the Fax Parameter tab.

4. Configure according to the default values.

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,

as shown in Figure 3-52.

Figure 3-52 Configuring Fax Parameters

Version: B/1 3-61

Page 128: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

3.4.53.4.5 Configuring the POS Telephone Number

The following introduces how to configure the POS service telephone number. The

POS number is provided by UnionPay Center. The equipment identifies the POS

services using the POS telephone number and optimizes the POS telephone

number.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE

manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to

bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select POTS ServiceíPOS Phone Number to

open the POS Phone Number tab.

4. Click the Add button on the toolbar. In the Enter the number of rows to add

dialog box that appears, type 1 and click OK to add a POS phone number

entry.

5. Configure the parameters according to the data provided by the UnionPay

Center.

6. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,

as shown in Figure 3-53.

Figure 3-53 Configuring the POS Telephone Number

3.4.63.4.6 Configuring the IPT Number

The following introduces how to configure the Intelligent Public Telephone (IPT)

number. The prefix of the IPT number is provided by the IPT platform. The

equipment identifies the IPTservice using the IPT number and optimizes the IPT

number.

3-62 Version: B/1

Page 129: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

3 Configuring Voice Services

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE

manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to

bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select POTS ServiceíIPT Phone Number to

open the IPT Phone Number tab.

4. Click the Add button on the toolbar. In the Enter the number of rows to add

dialog box that appears, type 1 and click OK to add an IPT phone number

entry.

5. Configure the parameters according to the data provided by the IPT platform.

6. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,

as shown in Figure 3-54.

Figure 3-54 Configuring the IPT Number

3.4.73.4.7 Configuring the Timeout Duration of the Signal Tone

This command is used to configure the timeout duration of different signal tones

after users pick up the telephone.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE

manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to

bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select POTS ServiceíSignal Tone Timer

Config to open the Signal Tone Timer Config tab.

4. Configure according to the default values.

Version: B/1 3-63

Page 130: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,

as shown in Figure 3-55.

Figure 3-55 Configuring the Timeout Duration of the Signal Tone

3.4.83.4.8 2833 Configuration

2833 is the RTP payload format used by the DTMF digital signal, phone tone and

phone signal. This function is used if no related parameters of the 2833 signaling

negotiation exist.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE

manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to

bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select POTS Serviceí2388 Config to open the

2388 Config tab.

4. Configure according to the default values.

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,

as shown in Figure 3-56.

Figure 3-56 Configuring 2833

3.53.5 MEGACO / MGCP Configuration

The following introduces the voice service MEGACO / MGCP configuration items.

3-64 Version: B/1

Page 131: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

3 Configuring Voice Services

3.5.13.5.1 Configuring Voice MD5 Authentication

Configure the MD5 authentication of the voice service for the authentication

between the MG and MGC. The MD5 authentication is applicable to the H.248

protocol only.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE

manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to

bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select POTS ServiceíMEGACO/MGCP

ConfigíVoice MD5 Authentication to bring up the Voice MD5

Authentication tab.

4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data of the project.

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,

as shown in Figure 3-57.

Figure 3-57 Configuring Voice MD5 Authentication

3.5.23.5.2 Configuring the Howler Tone Timeout ProcessingParameters

Users can configure this parameter to ensure the consistency of the softswitch

platform status and the ONU equipment side status after the howler tone times out.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE

manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to

bring up the Local Service Config tab.

Version: B/1 3-65

Page 132: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select POTS ServiceíMEGACO/MGCP

ConfigíVoice Off Hook Warning Tone Timeout to bring up the Off Hook

Warning Tone Timeout tab.

4. Configure according to the default values.

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,

as shown in Figure 3-58.

Figure 3-58 Configuring the Howler Tone Timeout Processing Parameters

3.5.33.5.3 Configuring the Caller ID Display Mode

Configure the caller ID display mode for subscribers. The caller ID display modes

include FSK and DTMF.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE

manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to

bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select POTS ServiceíMEGACO/MGCP

ConfigíCaller ID Mode to bring up the Caller ID Mode tab.

4. Configure according to the default values.

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,

as shown in Figure 3-59.

Figure 3-59 Configuring the Caller ID Display Mode

3-66 Version: B/1

Page 133: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

3 Configuring Voice Services

3.63.6 SIP Configuration

The following introduces how to make advanced SIP configurations and how to

configure the SIP subscriber call profile.

3.6.13.6.1 SIPAdvanced Configuration

This configuration is used for the intercommunication of the softswitch platform, and

is applicable to the softswitch platforms offered by different manufacturers. It is

advisable to use the default configuration.

In the configuration of user call configuration profile, if the three-party calling

function is disabled, the Call CW/CONF Mode parameter in the SIP advanced

configuration is invalid.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE

manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to

bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select POTS ServiceíSIP ConfigíSIP

Advanced Config to open the SIPAdvanced Config tab.

4. Configure according to the default values.

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,

as shown in Figure 3-60.

Figure 3-60 SIPAdvanced Configuration

Version: B/1 3-67

Page 134: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

3.6.23.6.2 Configuring the SIP User Call Profile

Some of the ONU voice functions will be enabled or disabled according to the profile.

After being bound to the profile, the ONU port will get its configuration from the

profile. It is advisable to use the default configuration.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE

manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to

bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select POTS ServiceíSIP ConfigíSIP User

Call Config Profile to open the SIP User Call Config Profile tab.

4. Configure according to the default values.

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,

as shown in Figure 3-61.

Figure 3-61 Configuring the SIP User Call Profile

3.73.7 Registering / Unregistering the MGC

Register or unregister the MGC currently connected to the AN5006-20. When the

currently connected MGC is unregistered, the AN5006-20 will disconnect from the

current MGC and automatically connect with the standby MGC. This operation is

applicable to the H.248 protocol.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE

manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to

bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3-68 Version: B/1

Page 135: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

3 Configuring Voice Services

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common ConfigíMGC Register/

Unregister to open the MGC Register/Unregister tab.

4. Set the register/unregister status to Register, and the MGC IP address to

192.168.1.1.

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,

as shown in Figure 3-62.

Figure 3-62 Registering / Unregistering the MGC

3.83.8 Registering / Unregistering the NGN User

Register or unregister the user port of the POTS card to / from the MGC of the

Softswitch platform. Users can no longer use the port once the port is unregistered.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE

manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to

bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select POTS ServiceíNGN User Register/

Unregister to open the NGN User Register/Unregister tab.

4. Click Add on the toolbar. In the Please Input the Rows for Add: dialog box

that appears subsequently, type 1 and click OK.

5. Set the port number to 1, and register/unregister status to Register.

6. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,

as shown in Figure 3-63.

Figure 3-63 Registering / Unregistering the NGN Users

Version: B/1 3-69

Page 136: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

3.93.9 Viewing the Voice Statistics Information

The following introduces how to view the voice statistics information.

3.9.13.9.1 Viewing the Statistics Information of Signaling Packet

The following introduces how to view the statistics information of the signaling

packets between the AN5006-20 and the softswitch platform MGC.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE

manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to

bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. Select Get InformationíVoice InformationíSignal Packets Statistic

Information in the Operational Tree to bring up the Signal Packets Statistic

Information tab.

4. Click the Read from Device button on the toolbar to read the configuration

information, as shown in Figure 3-64.

Figure 3-64 Viewing the Statistics Information of Signaling Packet

3.9.23.9.2 Viewing the Call Statistics Information

The following introduces how to view the statistics information of the RTP data flow

transmitted and received by the AN5006-20.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE

manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to

bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3-70 Version: B/1

Page 137: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

3 Configuring Voice Services

3. Select Get InformationíVoice InformationíCall Statistics Information in

the Operational Tree to bring up the Call Statistics Information tab.

4. Click the Read from Device button on the toolbar and read the configuration

information, as shown in Figure 3-65.

Figure 3-65 Viewing the Call Statistics Information

3.9.33.9.3 Viewing the Statistics Information of Voice StreamPort

The following introduces how to view the statistics information of the RTP data

stream at the POTS port on the AN5006-20.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE

manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to

bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. Select Get InformationíVoice InformationíRTP Stream Port Statistics

Information in the Operational Tree to bring up the RTP Stream Port

Statistics Information tab.

4. In the Switch Object pane, select the POTS card and click OK.

5. Click the Read from Device button on the toolbar to read the configuration

information, as shown in Figure 3-66.

Version: B/1 3-71

Page 138: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

Figure 3-66 Viewing the Statistics Information of Voice Stream Port

3.9.43.9.4 Viewing the Port Call Statistics Information

The following introduces how to view the statistics information of calls at the POTS

port on the AN5006-20.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE

manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to

bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. Select Get InformationíVoice InformationíCall Statistics Information in

the Operational Tree to bring up the Call Statistics Information tab.

4. In the Switch Object pane, select the POTS card and click OK.

5. Click the Read from Device button on the toolbar to read the configuration

information, as shown in Figure 3-67.

3-72 Version: B/1

Page 139: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

3 Configuring Voice Services

Figure 3-67 Viewing the Port Call Statistics Information

Version: B/1 3-73

Page 140: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device
Page 141: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

44 Configuring Data Services

The following introduces how to start up the data services for the AN5006-20.

Example of Configuring ADSL Data Services in the Transparent Mode

Example of Configuring ADSL Data Services in the Tag Mode

Example of Configuring the VDSL Data Service in the 1:1 Translation Mode

Example of Configuring the VDSL Data Service in the N:1 Translation Mode

Version: B/1 4-1

Annderson Weshleen
Page 142: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

4.14.1 Example of Configuring ADSL Data Servicesin the Transparent Mode

The following introduces how to configure ADSL data service in the transparent

mode.

4.1.14.1.1 Configuration Rules

u The AN5006-20 equipment supports four processing modes, i.e. Tag,

transparent transmission, 1:1 translation, and N:1 translation, for the Ethernet

frames uplinked from the user end. In this example, the transparent

transmission mode is used.

u When users use the AD64 card as the service interface card, the Ethernet

frames uplinked from the user side are added with the CVLAN Tags via an

intelligent switch or a home gateway. Then the AN5006-20 transparently

transmits the Ethernet frames, adds SVLAN Tags to them, and uplinks them to

the providers network.

u The user-defined COS value will be invalid in the transparent transmission

mode, and the system will use the COS value carried by the tag in the original

messages by default.

4.1.24.1.2 Network Diagram

Service Planning

Use the AD64 card of the AN5006-20 to access 64 data services.

4-2 Version: B/1

Page 143: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

4 Configuring Data Services

Network Diagram

Figure 4-1 Network Diagram for the ADSL Data Service in the Transparent Transmission

Mode

The AN5006-20 transparently transmits the inner CVLAN tags 100 to 163 on the

terminal side, adds the outer SVLAN tag 1000, and then transmits the data to the

providers network. In the downlink direction, the reverse process takes place.

Hardware Configuration

The equipment can access data services in the transparent transmission mode

using the AD32, AD64, CASA or VD32 card. In this example, an AD64 card is used.

4.1.34.1.3 Planning Data

The AD64 card of the AN5006-20 acts as the client end interface card; the

management control card, the PWRB card and the FANB card are required. The

planning data are shown in Table 4-1.

Table 4-1 Planning Data for the ADSL Service in the Transparent Transmission Mode

Item Description Example

Configuring the uplink

service VLANService Name

Configure this item according

to the network planning of the

operator. The service name

should contain no more than

30 characters.

data1

Version: B/1 4-3

Page 144: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

Table 4-1 Planning Data for the ADSL Service in the Transparent Transmission Mode

(Continued)

Item Description Example

Starting VLAN ID

The starting VLAN ID of the

uplink port service. The value

ranges from 1 to 4095

(excluding 4088, 4089, and

4092). The starting VLAN ID

should not be larger than the

ending VLAN ID.

1000

Ending VLAN ID

The ending VLAN ID of the

uplink port service. The value

ranges from 1 to 4095

(excluding 4088, 4089, and

4092). The starting VLAN ID

should not be larger than the

ending VLAN ID.

1000

Port No. / Trunk Group ID

The port number of the uplink

service VLAN or the Trunk

ground number.

GE1

Port Tag/Untag

Set the uplink service VLAN

tag processing mode. Two

options are available: tag and

untag.

u In the untag mode, the

tags of the uplink packets

will be stripped

automatically when they

pass the uplink port and

the packets will be

transmitted in the untag

form.

u In the tag mode, the tags

of the uplink data packets

will not be stripped when

they pass the uplink port.

tag

Configuring the ADSL

line profileProfile Name

Configure this item according

to the network planning of the

operator.

adsl

4-4 Version: B/1

Page 145: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

4 Configuring Data Services

Table 4-1 Planning Data for the ADSL Service in the Transparent Transmission Mode

(Continued)

Item Description Example

Transmission Mode

Configure this item according

to the operator’s network

planning; the default setting is

Adsl2+Adsl2 G.dmt ReAdsl2.

Adsl2+ Adsl2

G.dmt ReAdsl2

upRateMode

Uplink channel rate mode;

three modes are available:

fixed, adaptAtStart and

adaptAtRuntime. The default

mode is adaptAtStart.

adaptAtStart

downRateMode

Downlink channel rate mode;

three modes are available:

fixed, adaptAtStart and

adaptAtRuntime. The default

mode is adaptAtStart.

adaptAtStart

Line Type

Five types are available:

NoChannel, Fast, interleave

(by default), FastOrInterleave,

and FastAndInterleave.

interleave

Min Rate Dn (Kbit/s)

The value range is 0 to

100000; the unit is kbit/s; and

the default value is 0 kbit/s.

0

Min Rate Up (Kbit/s)

The value range is 0 to

100000; the unit is kbit/s; and

the default value is 0 kbit/s.

0

SNRM Dn (dB) The default value is 6.0 dB. 6.0

SNRM Up (dB) The default value is 6.0 dB. 6.0

Max SNRM Dn (dB)

The value ranges from 0 to

31; the unit is dB; and the

default value is 31dB.

31

Max SNRM Up (dB)

The value ranges from 0 to

31; the unit is dB; and the

default value is 31dB.

31

Min SNRM Dn (dB)

The value ranges from 0 to

31; the unit is dB; and the

default value is 0dB.

0

Min SNRM Up (dB)

The value ranges from 0 to

31; the unit is dB; and the

default value is 0dB.

0

Version: B/1 4-5

Page 146: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

Table 4-1 Planning Data for the ADSL Service in the Transparent Transmission Mode

(Continued)

Item Description Example

Max Interleave Delay Dn (ms)

The value ranges from 0 to

63; the unit is ms; and the

default value is 16ms.

16

Max Interleave Delay Up (ms)

The value ranges from 0 to

63; the unit is ms; and the

default value is 16ms.

16

Min INP Dn

The value ranges from 0 to 16

Symbol, and the default value

is 0 Symbol.

0 Symbol

Min INP Up

The value ranges from 0 to 16

Symbol, and the default value

is 0 Symbol.

0 Symbol

Bit Swap Dn

Enables or disables the

downlink bit swap function.

The default value is Disable.

Disable

Bit Swap Up

Enables or disables the uplink

bit swap function. The default

value is Disable.

Disable

Power Mode

Four power modes are

available: L0Mode, L2Mode,

L3Mode, L2AndL3Mode. The

default setting is L0Mode.

L0Mode

Pm L0 Time (s)

The value range is 0 to 65534;

the unit is second; and the

default value is 300 seconds.

300

Pm L2 Time (s)

The value range is 0 to 65534;

the unit is second; and the

default value is 30 seconds.

30

Pm L2 Atprt (dB)

The value ranges from 0 to

15; the unit is dB; and the

default value is 3dB.

3

Pm L2 Rate (Kbit/s)

The value range is 0 to 1024;

the unit is kbit/s; and the

default value is 32kbit/s.

32

Start Frequency Band (tone) / End

Frequency Band (tone)

Sets the ToneBlackout band.

The default setting is null.-

4-6 Version: B/1

Page 147: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

4 Configuring Data Services

Table 4-1 Planning Data for the ADSL Service in the Transparent Transmission Mode

(Continued)

Item Description Example

Binding ADSL ports

to the ADSL line

profile

Slot No.The slot number of the AD64

card that is actually used.3

Port No.The port number of the AD64

card in actual use.1 to 64

Profile IdThe configured ADSL line

profile.adsl

Configuring the PVC

profile

Profile Name

Configure according to the

network planning of the

operator. The maximum

length is 20 characters. The

default value is DEFPVC.PRF.

DEFPVC.PRF

PVCNOThe PVC index number. The

value ranges from 0 to 7.0

VPI

The value ranges from 0 to

255, and the default value is

8.

8

VCIThe value range is 0 and 32 to

65535; the default value is 35.35

Binding ADSL ports

to the PVC profile

Slot No.The slot number of the AD64

card that is actually used.3

Port No.The port number of the AD64

card in actual use.1 to 64

Profile IdSelect the configured PVC

profile.DEFPVC.PRF

Configuring the port

rate limiting profile

Profile Name

Configure this item according

to the network planning of the

operator. The profile name

should contain no more than

20 characters. The default

profile name is NULL.

PORTRATE.

PRF0

US Policing Status

Enables or disables the uplink

Policing status function. The

default setting is Disable.

Enable

US Policing CIR (Kbit/s)

The value ranges from 64 to

1000000; the unit is kbit/s;

and the default value is 64

kbit/s.

512

Version: B/1 4-7

Page 148: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

Table 4-1 Planning Data for the ADSL Service in the Transparent Transmission Mode

(Continued)

Item Description Example

US CBS (Byte)The value ranges from 0 to

4294967294; the unit is Byte.20000

US EBS (Byte)The value ranges from 0 to

4294967294; the unit is Byte.2000

DS Policing Status

Enables or disables the

downlink Policing status

function. The default setting is

Disable.

Enable

DS Policing CIR (Kbit/s)

The value range is 64 to

1000000; the unit is kbit/s;

and the default value is

64kbit/s.

8000

DS PIR (Kbit/s)

The value ranges between 0

and 16777215; the unit is

kbit/s.

10240

Binding ADSL ports

to the rate limiting

profile

Slot No.The slot number of the AD64

card that is actually used.3

Port No.The port number of the AD64

card in actual use.1 to 64

Profile IDSelect the configured rate

limiting profile.

PORTRATE.

PRF0

Configuring the port

service VLAN

Slot NumberThe slot number of the AD64

card in actual use.3

Port No.The port number of the AD64

card in actual use.1 to 64

PVCNOThe PVC in actual use. The

value range is from 0 to 7.0

Service Type

The service types include

unicast and multicast. The

data service is unicast.

Unicast

CVLAN Mode

Configure the CVLAN mode

for this service; the tag mode,

the transparent mode and the

translation mode are

supported.

Transparent

4-8 Version: B/1

Page 149: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

4 Configuring Data Services

Table 4-1 Planning Data for the ADSL Service in the Transparent Transmission Mode

(Continued)

Item Description Example

CVLAN Rule ID

Rules of the CVLAN

translation. When rules are

required, this parameter is the

name of the user-defined rule;

when rules are not required,

set this parameter to null.

NULL

CVLAN Settings

TPID The default value is 33024. 33024

VLAN IDThe CVLAN ID, ranging from

1 to 4095.100 to 163

Priority or COS

The CVLAN priority, ranging

from 0 to 7. 7 is the highest

priority level, and 0 is the

lowest one.

0

QinQ State

The stacked VLANs.

Configure this item according

to the network planning of the

operator. Select Enable or

Disable.

Enable

QinQ Rule ID

The QinQ rules for binding

services. This parameter is

the name of the user-defined

rule. When rules are not

required, set this parameter to

null.

NULL

QinQ Settings

Priority or COS

The SVLAN priority, ranging

from 0 to 7. 7 is the highest

priority level, and 0 is the

lowest one.

0

VLAN IDThe SVLAN ID, ranging from

1 to 4095.1000

TPID 33024 33024

Enabling the ADSL

port

Slot No.The slot number of the AD64

card that is actually used.3

Port No.The port number of the AD64

card in actual use.1 to 64

Enable

Enables or disables the ADSL

port. The default setting is

Disable.

Enable

Version: B/1 4-9

Page 150: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

Table 4-1 Planning Data for the ADSL Service in the Transparent Transmission Mode

(Continued)

Item Description Example

Enabling the port

PVC

Slot NumberThe slot number of the AD64

card in actual use.3

Port NumberThe port number of the AD64

card in actual use.1 to 64

PVC IndexThe PVC index number. The

value ranges from 0 to 7.0

PVC EnableEnables or disables the PVC.

The default setting is Disable.Enable

4.1.44.1.4 Configuration Flow

The configuration flow of the ADSL data service in the transparent mode is shown in

Figure 4-2.

4-10 Version: B/1

Annderson Weshleen
Page 151: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

4 Configuring Data Services

Figure 4-2 Flow of Configuring the ADSL Data Service - Transparent Mode

Version: B/1 4-11

Page 152: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

4.1.54.1.5 Configuring the Uplink Service VLAN

Process the uplink VLAN tags via the AN5006-20's uplink port. The services are

distinguished by their VLAN IDs. The user services whose VLAN IDs are within the

set range will be transmitted to the upper level network by the OLTequipment

AN5116-06B. Vice versa.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE

manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to

bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Data ServiceíMCU Port Service VLAN

to open the MCU Port Service VLAN tab.

4. Click the Add button on the toolbar. In the Enter the number of rows to add

dialog box that appears, type 1 and click OK to add a service VLAN entry.

5. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

6. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,

as shown in Figure 4-3.

Figure 4-3 Configuring the Uplink Service VLAN

4.1.64.1.6 Configuring the ADSL Line Profile

Configure basic parameters of the ADSL line profile, including parameters such as

the uplink / downlink rate mode and line type.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE

manager.

4-12 Version: B/1

Annderson Weshleen
Page 153: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

4 Configuring Data Services

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to

bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common ConfigíProfile Configí

ADSL Line Profile to open the ADSL Line Profile tab.

4. Click the Add button on the toolbar, and enter 1 in the Enter the number of

rows to add dialog box that appears. Click OK to create a new ADSL line

profile.

5. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

6. Click Create on Device on the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown

in Figure 4-4.

Figure 4-4 Configuring the ADSL Line Profile for the ADSL Service in the Transparent

Transmission Mode

4.1.74.1.7 Binding ADSL Ports to the ADSL Line Profile

Bind designated ports to the set ADSL line profile, and the ports will control data

stream according to the transmission rules and rate limit defined in the profile.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE

manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to

bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common ConfigíPort ConfigíADSL

Port Binding Line Profile. Select the AD64 card to be configured in the Select

Object window that appears, and then click OK to open the ADSL Port

Binding Line Profile tab.

4. Click the Batch Modify button, and select the Enable check box in the Modify

in a batch manner dialog box.

Version: B/1 4-13

Page 154: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

5. Select PORTRATE.PRF0 in the Initial list box, enter 0 in the Step text box, and

enter 64 in the Repeat text box, as shown in Figure 4-5.

Figure 4-5 Modifying the ADSL Line Profile in a Batch Manner

6. Click Create on Device on the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown

in Figure 4-6.

Figure 4-6 Binding ADSL Ports to the ADSL Line Profile for the ADSL Service in the

Transparent Transmission Mode (Completed)

4.1.84.1.8 Configuring the Port Rate Limiting Profile

Configure the port rate limiting profile and set the parameters including uplink /

downlink Policing status and uplink / downlink port assured rate.

4-14 Version: B/1

Page 155: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

4 Configuring Data Services

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE

manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to

bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common ConfigíProfile ConfigíPort

Rate Profile to bring up the Port Rate Profile tab.

4. Click the Add button on the toolbar, and enter 1 in the Enter the number of

rows to add dialog box that appears. Click OK to create a new port rate limiting

profile.

5. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

6. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,

as shown in Figure 4-7.

Figure 4-7 Configuring the Port Rate Limiting Profile for the ADSL Service in the Transparent

Transmission Mode

4.1.94.1.9 Binding ADSL Ports to the Rate Limiting Profile

Bind designated ports to the set rate limiting profile, and the ports will control the

data stream according to the uplink rate defined in the profile.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE

manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to

bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common ConfigíPort ConfigíPort

Binding Rate Profile. In the Select Object window that appears, select the

AD64 card to be configured, and then click OK to open the Port Binding Rate

Profile tab.

Version: B/1 4-15

Page 156: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,

as shown in Figure 4-8.

Figure 4-8 Binding ADSL Ports to the Rate Limiting Profile for the ADSL Service in the

Transparent Transmission Mode

4.1.104.1.10 Configuring the PVC Profile

Configure PVC basic parameters such as PVC index, virtual path identifier and

virtual channel identifier value for identifying each PVC.

The AD64 card provides 64 ADSL user ports; and one ADSL port corresponds to

eight PVCs. One PVC can be configured with up to 16 subscriber services, and one

ADSL port can also be configured with up to 16 subscriber services; that is, the

subscriber services are shared among the PVCs.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE

manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to

bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common ConfigíProfile ConfigíPVC

Profile to open the PVC Profile tab.

4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

5. Click Create on Device on the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown

in Figure 4-9.

4-16 Version: B/1

Page 157: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

4 Configuring Data Services

Figure 4-9 Configuring the PVC Profile for the ADSL Service in the Transparent Transmission

Mode

4.1.114.1.11 Binding ADSL Ports to the PVC Profile

Bind designated ports to the set PVC profile, and the ports will control the data

stream according to the transmission rules defined in the profile.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE

manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to

bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common ConfigíPort ConfigíPort

Binding PVC Profile. Select the AD64 card to be configured in the Select

Object window that appears, and then click OK to open the Port Binding PVC

Profile tab.

4. Click the Batch Modify button on the toolbar, and select the line Profile Id in

the Modify in a batch manner dialog box that appears.

5. Select DEFPVC.PRF from the Initial drop-down list, and use the default values

for other parameters. Then click OK, as shown in Figure 4-10.

Version: B/1 4-17

Page 158: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

Figure 4-10 Binding ADSL Ports to the PVC Profile for the ADSL Service in the Transparent

Transmission Mode

6. Click Create on Device on the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown

in Figure 4-11.

Figure 4-11 Binding ADSL Ports to the PVC Profile for the ADSL Service in the Transparent

Transmission Mode (Completed)

4-18 Version: B/1

Page 159: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

4 Configuring Data Services

4.1.124.1.12 Configuring the Port Service VLAN

Configure the service VLAN for the designated port on the AD64 card based on

unicast service flow.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE

manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to

bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Data ServiceíPort VLAN Config to

open the Port VLAN Config tab.

4. Click AD64 in the left pane, and click PVC Index in the upper-right pane. Then

select ports 0 to 64 with the PVC Index 0, as shown in Figure 4-12.

Figure 4-12 Selecting the Ports with PVC Index 0 for the ADSL Service in the Transparent

Transmission Mode

5. Click the Add button, and in the Please Select Port & PVC dialog box that

appears, click the >> button to add all the ports with the PVC Index 0 to the

Selected pane, as shown in Figure 4-13.

Version: B/1 4-19

Page 160: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

Figure 4-13 Selecting the Ports and the PVC to be Added with Data

6. Click OK, and enter 1 in the Enter the number of rows to add dialog box that

appears. Then click OK and return to the Port VLAN Config window.

7. Click the first row in the lower right pane, and then click the Batch Modify

button.

8. In the Batch Modify dialog box that appears, select CVLAN Settings.

9. In the Configuration Item group box, select the line VLAN ID, entering 100 in

the Initial Value field and 1 in the step field.

Note:

When the VLAN ID values increase or decrease regularly, set the Step to

the difference between two successive values. The item Redo refers to

the count of repeated values prior to calculation of the increment.

10. Select the line Priority or COS, and select 0 from the Initial Value drop-down

list. Use the default values for other parameters.

4-20 Version: B/1

Page 161: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

4 Configuring Data Services

11. Select the line TPID, and enter 33024 in the Initial Value field. Use default

values for other parameters, as shown in Figure 4-14.

Figure 4-14 Modifying the CVLAN Settings in a Batch Manner for the ADSL Service in the

Transparent Transmission Mode

12. Configure other parameters according to the planning data.

13. Return to the Port VLAN Config window, and click the Create on Device

button on the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown in Figure 4-15.

Version: B/1 4-21

Page 162: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

Figure 4-15 The Port Service VLAN Configuration Completed for the ADSL Service in the

Transparent Transmission Mode

4.1.134.1.13 Enabling the ADSL Port

Enable the ADSL port. When disabled, the ports will be unable to receive or transmit

data.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE

manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to

bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common ConfigíPort ConfigíPort

Enable. Select the AD64 card to be configured in the Select Object window

that appears, and then click OK.

4. Click the Batch Modify button, and select the Enable check box in the Modify

in a batch manner dialog box.

4-22 Version: B/1

Page 163: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

4 Configuring Data Services

5. Select Enable from the Initial drop-down list, and click OK, as shown in

Figure 4-16.

Figure 4-16 Enabling ADSL Ports for ADSL Services in the Transparent Transmission Mode

6. Click Create on Device on the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown

in Figure 4-17.

Figure 4-17 Enabling the ADSL Ports for the ADSL Service in the Transparent Transmission

Mode (Completed)

Version: B/1 4-23

Page 164: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

4.1.144.1.14 Enabling the Port PVC

Enable the port PVC.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE

manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to

bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree, select Common ConfigíPVC Enable. Select the

AD64 card to be configured in the Select object window that appears, and then

click OK to open the PVC Enable tab.

4. Click the Batch Modify button on the toolbar. In the Modify in a batch manner

dialog box that appears, select the line PVC Enable, and enter 64 in the

Repeat field. Then select Enable from the drop-down list of Initial, and enter 0

in the Step field. Use the default settings for other parameters, as shown in

Figure 4-18.

4-24 Version: B/1

Page 165: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

4 Configuring Data Services

Figure 4-18 Enabling PVC for Multiple Ports in a Batch Manner for the ADSL Service in the

Transparent Transmission Mode

5. Click OK, and the PVCs with the index number 0 of the 64 ports will be set to

Enable in a batch manner.

6. Return to the PVC Enable window, and click the Create on Device button on

the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown in Figure 4-19 .

Figure 4-19 Completion of Enabling Port PVC-ADSL Service Transparent Mode

Version: B/1 4-25

Page 166: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

4.1.154.1.15 Configuration Result

PC1 to PC64 can access Internet after configuration is completed.

4.24.2 Example of Configuring ADSL Data Servicesin the Tag Mode

The following introduces how to configure the ADSL data service in the Tag mode.

4.2.14.2.1 Configuration Rules

u The AD64 card provides 64 ADSL user ports; and one ADSL port corresponds

to eight PVCs. One PVC can be configured with up to 16 subscriber services.

One ADSL port can also be configured with up to 16 subscriber services.

u The equipment supports four processing modes, i.e. Tag, transparent, 1:1

translation, and N:1 translation, for the Ethernet frames uplinked from the

subscriber end. In this example, we use the Tag mode.

u When the subscriber uses the AD64 card as the service interface card, the

subscriber's PCs are connected with ports on the interface cards provided by

the equipment through the modems. To be specific, packets from the

subscribers are all untagged. The Ethernet frames are respectively added with

the stacked VLANs by the AN5006-20 and then uplinked to the upper layer

network.

4.2.24.2.2 Network Diagram

Service Planning

Use the AD64 card of the AN5006-20 to access 64 data services.

4-26 Version: B/1

Page 167: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

4 Configuring Data Services

Network Diagram

Figure 4-20 Network Diagram for the ADSL Data Service in the Tag Mode

The AN5006-20 adds the outer SVLAN tag 1000 to the inner CVLAN tags 100 to

163 on the terminal side, and then transmits the data to the providers network. In the

downlink direction, the reverse process takes place.

Hardware Configuration

The equipment can access data services in the transparent transmission mode

using the AD32, AD64, CASA or VD32 card. In this example, an AD64 card is used.

4.2.34.2.3 Planning Data

The AD64 card of the AN5006-20 acts as the client end interface card; the

management control card, the PWRB card and the FANB card are required. The

planning data are shown in Table 4-2.

Table 4-2 Planning Data for the ADSL Service in the Tag Mode

Item Description Example

Configuring the

uplink service

VLAN

Service Name

Configure this item according to

the network planning of the

operator. The service name should

contain no more than 30

characters.

data2

Version: B/1 4-27

Page 168: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

Table 4-2 Planning Data for the ADSL Service in the Tag Mode (Continued)

Item Description Example

Starting VLAN ID

The starting VLAN ID of the

service. Value range: 1 to 4095

(excluding 4088, 4089, and 4092).

The starting VLAN ID should not

be larger than the ending VLAN

ID.

1000

Ending VLAN ID

The ending VLAN ID of the

service. The value ranges from 1

to 4095 (except 4088, 4089, and

4092). The starting VLAN ID

should not be larger than the

ending VLAN ID.

1000

Port No. / Trunk Group ID

The port number of the uplink

service VLAN or the Trunk ground

number.

GE1

Port Tag / Untag

The uplink service VLAN tag

processing mode. Two options are

available: tag and untag.

u In the untag mode, the tags of

the uplink packets will be

stripped automatically when

they pass the uplink port and

the packets will be transmitted

in the untag form.

u In the tag mode, the tags of

the uplink data packets will

not be stripped when they

pass the uplink port.

tag

Configuring the

ADSL line profile

Profile Name

Configure this item according to

the network planning of the

operator.

adsl

Transmission Mode

Configure this item according to

the operator’s network planning;

the default setting is Adsl2+Adsl2

G.dmt ReAdsl2.

Adsl2+ Adsl2

G.dmt ReAdsl2

upRateMode

Uplink channel rate mode; three

modes are available: fixed,

adaptAtStart and adaptAtRuntime.

The default mode is adaptAtStart.

adaptAtStart

4-28 Version: B/1

Page 169: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

4 Configuring Data Services

Table 4-2 Planning Data for the ADSL Service in the Tag Mode (Continued)

Item Description Example

downRateMode

Downlink channel rate mode;

three modes are available: fixed,

adaptAtStart and adaptAtRuntime.

The default mode is adaptAtStart.

adaptAtStart

Line Type

Five types are available:

NoChannel, Fast, interleave (by

default), FastOrInterleave, and

FastAndInterleave.

interleave

Min Rate Dn (Kbit/s)

The value range is 0 to 100000;

the unit is kbit/s; and the default

value is 0kbit/s.

0

Min Rate Up (Kbit/s)

The value range is 0 to 100000;

the unit is kbit/s; and the default

value is 0kbit/s.

0

SNRM Dn (dB) The default value is 6.0 dB. 6.0

SNRM Up (dB) The default value is 6.0 dB. 6.0

Max SNRM Dn (dB)

The value ranges from 0 to 31; the

unit is dB; and the default value is

31dB.

31

Max SNRM Up (dB)

The value ranges from 0 to 31; the

unit is dB; and the default value is

31dB.

31

Min SNRM Dn (dB)

The value ranges from 0 to 31; the

unit is dB; and the default value is

0dB.

0

Min SNRM Up (dB)

The value ranges from 0 to 31; the

unit is dB; and the default value is

0dB.

0

Max Interleave Delay Dn (ms)

The value ranges from 0 to 63; the

unit is ms; and the default value is

16ms.

16

Max Interleave Delay Up (ms)

The value ranges from 0 to 63; the

unit is ms; and the default value is

16ms.

16

Min INP Dn

The value ranges from 0 to 16

Symbol, and the default value is 0

Symbol.

0 Symbol

Version: B/1 4-29

Page 170: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

Table 4-2 Planning Data for the ADSL Service in the Tag Mode (Continued)

Item Description Example

Min INP Up

The value ranges from 0 to 16

Symbol, and the default value is 0

Symbol.

0 Symbol

Bit Swap Dn

Enables or disables the downlink

bit swap function. The default

value is Disable.

Disable

Bit Swap Up

Enables or disables the uplink bit

swap function. The default value is

Disable.

Disable

Power Mode

Four power modes are available:

L0Mode, L2Mode, L3Mode,

L2AndL3Mode. The default setting

is L0Mode.

L0Mode

Pm L0 Time (s)

The value range is 0 to 65534; the

unit is second; and the default

value is 300 seconds.

300

Pm L2 Time (s)

The value range is 0 to 65534; the

unit is second; and the default

value is 30 seconds.

30

Pm L2 Atprt (dB)The value range is 0 to 15; the unit

is dB; and the default value is 3dB.3

Pm L2 Rate (Kbit/s)

The value range is 0 to 1024; the

unit is kbit/s; and the default value

is 32kbit/s.

32

Start Frequency Band (tone) / End

Frequency Band (tone)

Sets the ToneBlackout band. The

default setting is null.-

Binding ADSL

ports to the

ADSL line profile

Slot No.The slot number of the AD64 card

that is actually used.3

Port No.The port number of the AD64 card

in actual use.1 to 64

Profile Id The configured ADSL line profile. adsl

Configuring the

PVC profile

Profile Name

Configure according to the

network planning of the operator.

The maximum length is 20

characters. The default value is

defaultPvcPrf.

DEFPVC.PRF

PVCNOThe PVC index number. The value

ranges from 0 to 7.0

4-30 Version: B/1

Page 171: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

4 Configuring Data Services

Table 4-2 Planning Data for the ADSL Service in the Tag Mode (Continued)

Item Description Example

VPIThe value ranges from 0 to 255,

and the default value is 8.8

VCIThe value range is 0 and 32 to

65535; the default value is 35.35

Binding ADSL

ports to the PVC

profile

Slot No.The slot number of the AD64 card

that is actually used.3

Port No.The port number of the AD64 card

in actual use.1 to 64

Profile Id Select the configured PVC profile. DEFPVC.PRF

Configuring the

port rate limiting

profile

Profile Name

Configure this item according to

the network planning of the

operator. The profile name should

contain no more than 20

characters. The default profile

name is NULL.

PORTRATE.

PRF0

US Policing Status

Enables or disables the uplink

Policing status function. The

default setting is Disable.

Disable

US Policing CIR (Kbit/s)

The value range is 64 to 1000000;

the unit is kbit/s; and the default

value is 64kbit/s.

512

US CBS (Byte)The value ranges from 0 to

4294967294; the unit is Byte.20000

US EBS (Byte)The value ranges from 0 to

4294967294; the unit is Byte.20000

DS Policing Status

Enables or disables the downlink

Policing status function. The

default setting is Disable.

Enable

DS Policing CIR (Kbit/s)

The value range is 64 to 1000000;

the unit is kbit/s; and the default

value is 64kbit/s.

8000

DS PIR (Kbit/s)The value ranges between 0 and

16777215; the unit is kbit/s.10240

Binding ADSL

ports to the rate

limiting profile

Slot No.The slot number of the AD64 card

that is actually used.3

Port No.The port number of the AD64 card

in actual use.1 to 64

Version: B/1 4-31

Page 172: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

Table 4-2 Planning Data for the ADSL Service in the Tag Mode (Continued)

Item Description Example

Profile IDSelect the configured rate limiting

profile.

PORTRATE.

PRF0

Configuring the

port service

VLAN

Slot NumberThe slot number of the AD64 card

in actual use.3

Port NumberThe port number of the AD64 card

in actual use.1 to 64

PVC IndexThe PVC in actual use. The value

ranges from 0 to 7.0

Service Type

The service types include unicast

and multicast. The data service is

unicast.

Unicast

CVLAN Mode

Configure the CVLAN mode for

this service; the tag mode, the

transparent mode and the

translation mode are supported.

TAG

CVLAN Rule ID

Rules of the CVLAN translation.

When rules are required, this

parameter is the name of the user-

defined rule; when rules are not

required, set this parameter to null.

NULL

CVLAN Settings

TPID The default value is 33024. 33024

VLAN IDThe CVLAN ID, ranging from 1 to

4095.100 to 163

Priority or COS

The CVLAN priority, ranging from

0 to 7. 7 is the highest priority

level, and 0 is the lowest one.

0

QinQ State

The stacked VLANs. Configure

this item according to the network

planning of the operator. Select

Enable or Disable.

Enable

QinQ Rule ID

The QinQ rules for binding

services. This parameter is the

name of the user-defined rule.

When rules are not required, set

this parameter to null.

NULL

QinQ Settings Priority or COS

The SVLAN priority, ranging from

0 to 7. 7 is the highest priority

level, and 0 is the lowest one.

0

4-32 Version: B/1

Page 173: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

4 Configuring Data Services

Table 4-2 Planning Data for the ADSL Service in the Tag Mode (Continued)

Item Description Example

VLAN IDThe SVLAN ID, ranging from 1 to

4095.1000

TPID 33024 33024

Enabling the

ADSL port

Slot No.The slot number of the AD64 card

that is actually used.3

Port No.The port number of the AD64 card

in actual use.1 to 64

EnableEnables or disables the ADSL

port. The default setting is Disable.Enable

Enabling the port

PVC

Slot NumberThe slot number of the AD64 card

that is actually used.3

Port NumberThe port number of the AD64 card

in actual use.1 to 64

PVC IndexThe PVC index number. The value

ranges from 0 to 7.0

PVC EnableEnables or disables the PVC. The

default setting is Disable.Enable

4.2.44.2.4 Configuration Flow

The flow of configuring the ADSL data service in the Tag mode is shown in

Figure 4-21.

Version: B/1 4-33

Page 174: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

Figure 4-21 The Configuration Flow of the ADSL Data Service in the Tag Mode

4-34 Version: B/1

Page 175: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

4 Configuring Data Services

4.2.54.2.5 Configuring the Uplink Service VLAN

Process the uplink VLAN tags via the AN5006-20's uplink port. The services are

distinguished by their VLAN IDs. The user services whose VLAN IDs are within the

set range will be transmitted to the upper level network by the OLTequipment

AN5116-06B. Vice versa.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE

manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to

bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Data ServiceíMCU Port Service VLAN

to open the MCU Port Service VLAN tab.

4. Click the Add button on the toolbar. In the Enter the number of rows to add

dialog box that appears, type 1 and click OK to add a service VLAN entry.

5. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

6. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,

as shown in Figure 4-22.

Figure 4-22 Configuring the Uplink Service VLAN

4.2.64.2.6 Configuring the ADSL Line Profile

Configure basic parameters of the ADSL line profile, including parameters such as

the uplink / downlink rate mode and line type.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE

manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to

bring up the Local Service Config tab.

Version: B/1 4-35

Page 176: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common ConfigíProfile Configí

ADSL Line Profile to open the ADSL Line Profile tab.

4. Click the Add button on the toolbar, and enter 1 in the Enter the number of

rows to add dialog box that appears. Click OK to create a new ADSL line

profile.

5. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

6. Click Create on Device on the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown

in Figure 4-23.

Figure 4-23 Configuring the ADSL Line Profile for the ADSL Service in the Tag Mode

4.2.74.2.7 Binding ADSL Ports to the ADSL Line Profile

Bind designated ports to the set ADSL line profile, and the ports will control data

stream according to the transmission rules and rate limit defined in the profile.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE

manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to

bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common ConfigíPort ConfigíADSL

Port Binding Line Profile. Select the AD64 card to be configured in the Select

Object window that appears, and then click OK to open the ADSL Port

Binding Line Profile tab.

4. Click the Batch Modify button, and select the Enable check box in the Modify

in a batch manner dialog box.

5. Select PORTRATE.PRF0 in the Initial list box, enter 0 in the Step text box, and

enter 64 in the Repeat text box, as shown in Figure 4-24.

4-36 Version: B/1

Page 177: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

4 Configuring Data Services

Figure 4-24 Modifying the ADSL Line Profile in a Batch Manner

6. Click Create on Device on the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown

in Figure 4-25.

Figure 4-25 Binding ADSL Ports to the ADSL Line Profile for the ADSL Service in the Tag

Mode (Completed)

4.2.84.2.8 Configuring the PVC Profile

Configure PVC basic parameters such as PVC index, virtual path identifier and

virtual channel identifier value for identifying each PVC.

Version: B/1 4-37

Page 178: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

The AD64 card provides 64 ADSL user ports; and one ADSL port corresponds to

eight PVCs. One PVC can be configured with up to 16 subscriber services, and one

ADSL port can also be configured with up to 16 subscriber services; that is, the

subscriber services are shared among the PVCs.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE

manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to

bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common ConfigíProfile ConfigíPVC

Profile to open the PVC Profile tab.

4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

5. Click Create on Device on the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown

in Figure 4-26.

Figure 4-26 Configuring the PVC Profile for the ADSL Service in the Tag Mode

4.2.94.2.9 Binding ADSL Ports to the PVC Profile

Bind designated ports to the set PVC profile, and the ports will control the data

stream according to the transmission rules defined in the profile.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE

manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to

bring up the Local Service Config tab.

4-38 Version: B/1

Page 179: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

4 Configuring Data Services

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common ConfigíPort ConfigíPort

Binding PVC Profile. Select the AD64 card to be configured in the Select

Object window that appears, and then click OK to open the Port Binding PVC

Profile tab.

4. Click the Batch Modify button on the toolbar, and select the line Profile Id in

the Modify in a batch manner dialog box that appears.

5. Select DEFPVC.PRF from the Initial drop-down list, and use the default values

for other parameters. Then click OK, as shown in Figure 4-27.

Figure 4-27 Binding ADSL Ports to the PVC Profile for the ADSL Service in the Tag Mode

6. Click Create on Device on the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown

in Figure 4-28.

Version: B/1 4-39

Page 180: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

Figure 4-28 Binding ADSL Ports to the PVC Profile for the ADSL Service in the Tag Mode

(Completed)

4.2.104.2.10 Configuring the Port Rate Limiting Profile

Configure the port rate limiting profile and set the parameters including uplink /

downlink Policing status and uplink / downlink port assured rate.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE

manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to

bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common ConfigíProfile ConfigíPort

Rate Profile to bring up the Port Rate Profile tab.

4. Click the Add button on the toolbar, and enter 1 in the Enter the number of

rows to add dialog box that appears. Click OK to create a new port rate limiting

profile.

5. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

6. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,

as shown in Figure 4-29.

Figure 4-29 Configuring the Port Rate Limiting Profile for the ADSL Service in the Tag Mode

4-40 Version: B/1

Page 181: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

4 Configuring Data Services

4.2.114.2.11 Binding ADSL Ports to the Rate Limiting Profile

Bind designated ports to the set rate limiting profile, and the ports will control the

data stream according to the uplink rate defined in the profile.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE

manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to

bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common ConfigíPort ConfigíPort

Binding Rate Profile. In the Select Object window that appears, select the

AD64 card to be configured, and then click OK to open the Port Binding Rate

Profile tab.

4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,

as shown in Figure 4-30.

Figure 4-30 Binding ADSL Ports to the Rate Limiting Profile for the ADSL Service in the Tag

Mode

4.2.124.2.12 Configuring the Port Service VLAN

Configure the service VLAN for the designated port on the AD64 card based on

unicast service flow.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE

manager.

Version: B/1 4-41

Page 182: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to

bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Data ServiceíPort VLAN Config to

open the Port VLAN Config tab.

4. Click AD64 in the left pane, and click PVC Index in the upper-right pane. Then

select ports 0 to 64 with the PVC Index 0, as shown in Figure 4-31.

Figure 4-31 Selecting the Ports with PVC Index 0 for the ADSL Service in the Transparent

Transmission Mode

5. Click the Add button, and in the Please Select Port & PVC dialog box that

appears, click the >> button to add all the ports with the PVC Index 0 to the

Selected pane, as shown in Figure 4-32.

4-42 Version: B/1

Page 183: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

4 Configuring Data Services

Figure 4-32 Selecting the Ports and the PVC to be Added with Data

6. Click OK, and enter 1 in the Enter the number of rows to add dialog box that

appears. Then click OK and return to the Port VLAN Config window.

7. Click the first row in the lower right pane, and then click the Batch Modify

button.

8. In the Batch Modify dialog box that appears, select CVLAN Settings.

9. In the Configuration Item group box, select the line VLAN ID, entering 100 in

the Initial Value field and 1 in the step field.

Note:

When the VLAN ID values increase or decrease regularly, set the Step to

the difference between two successive values. The item Redo refers to

the count of repeated values prior to calculation of the increment.

10. Select the line Priority or COS, and select 0 from the Initial Value drop-down

list. Use the default values for other parameters.

Version: B/1 4-43

Page 184: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

11. Select the line TPID, and enter 33024 in the Initial Value field. Use default

values for other parameters, as shown in Figure 4-33.

Figure 4-33 Modifying the CVLAN Settings in a Batch Manner for the ADSL Service in the

Transparent Transmission Mode

12. Configure other parameters according to the planning data.

13. Return to the Port VLAN Config window, and click the Create on Device

button on the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown in Figure 4-34.

4-44 Version: B/1

Page 185: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

4 Configuring Data Services

Figure 4-34 The Port Service VLAN Configuration Completed in the Tag Mode

4.2.134.2.13 Enabling the ADSL Port

Enable the ADSL port. The port will be unable to receive and transmit data when

disabled.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE

manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to

bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common ConfigíPort ConfigíPort

Enable. Select the AD64 card to be configured in the Select Object window

that appears, and then click OK to open the Port Enable tab.

Version: B/1 4-45

Page 186: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

4. Click the Batch Modify button, and select the Enable check box in the Modify

in a batch manner dialog box.

5. Select Enable from the Initial drop-down list, and click OK, as shown in

Figure 4-35.

Figure 4-35 Enabling the ADSL Port for the ADSL Service in the Tag Mode

6. Click Create on Device on the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown

in Figure 4-36.

Figure 4-36 Enabling the ADSL Port for the ADSL Service in the Tag Mode (Completed)

4-46 Version: B/1

Page 187: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

4 Configuring Data Services

4.2.144.2.14 Enabling the Port PVC

Enable the port PVC.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE

manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to

bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree, select Common ConfigíPVC Enable. Select the

AD64 card to be configured in the Select object window that appears, and then

click OK to open the PVC Enable tab.

4. Click the Batch Modify button on the toolbar. In the Modify in a batch manner

dialog box that appears, select the line PVC Enable, and enter 64 in the

Repeat field. Then select Enable from the drop-down list of Initial, and enter 0

in the Step field. Use the default settings for other parameters, as shown in

Figure 4-37.

Figure 4-37 Enabling PVC for Multiple Ports in a Batch Manner in the Tag Mode

Version: B/1 4-47

Page 188: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

5. Click OK, and the PVCs with the index number 0 of the 64 ports will be set to

Enable in a batch manner.

6. Return to the PVC Enable window, and click the Create on Device button on

the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown in Figure 4-38.

Figure 4-38 Completion of Enabling Port PVC for ADSL Service in the Tag Mode

4.2.154.2.15 Configuration Result

PC1 to PC64 can access Internet after the configuration is completed.

4.34.3 Example of Configuring the VDSL DataService in the 1:1 Translation Mode

The following introduces how to configure the VDSL data service in the 1:1

translation mode.

4.3.14.3.1 Configuration Rules

u The VD32 card provides 32 VDSL user ports, and one VDSL port corresponds

to eight PVCs. One PVC can be configured with up to 16 subscriber services.

One VDSL port can also be configured with up to 16 subscriber services; that is,

the subscriber services are shared among the PVCs.

u The VDSL port of the VD32 card supports three transport modes: ATM, PTM,

and self adapting. Here we use the PTM mode as an example.

4-48 Version: B/1

Page 189: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

4 Configuring Data Services

u When the ATM is used, the PVC function must be configured and the VDSL

service is validated in the PVC. When the PTM is used, the PVC function

should not be configured and the VDSL service is validated in the port.

u The equipment supports four processing modes, i.e. Tag, transparent, 1:1

translation, and N:1 translation, for the Ethernet frame uplinked from the

subscriber end. In this example the 1:1 translation mode is configured.

u When the VD32 card is used as the service interface card, the Ethernet frame

uplinked from the user side is added with the VLAN Tag via the user’s intelligent

switch or a home gateway with the ADSL uplink port. And then the VLAN ID is

translated into another valid VLAN ID by the equipment; each user VLAN ID is

translated into a different VLAN ID. After that, the service is added with the

SVLAN Tag and transmitted to the upper layer network.

u The user-defined COS value will be invalid in the 1:1 translation mode, and the

system will use the COS value carried by the tag in the original messages by

default.

4.3.24.3.2 Network Diagram

Service Planning

Use the AD32 card of the AN5006-20 to access 32 data services.

Network Diagram

Figure 4-39 Network Diagram for the VDSL Data Service in the 1:1 Translation Mode

Version: B/1 4-49

Page 190: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

The AN5006-20 translates the CVLAN tags 100 to 131 on the terminal side into the

CVLAN tags 200 to 231, add the SVLAN tag 1000 to them, and then send the data

to the upper layer network. In the downlink direction, the reverse process takes

place.

Hardware Configuration

The equipment can access data services in the transparent transmission mode

using the AD32, AD64, CASA or VD32 card. In this example, an VD32 card is used.

4.3.34.3.3 Planning Data

The VD32 card in Slot 2 of the AN5006-20 serves as the interface card at the user

side. The management control card, the PWRB card, and the FANB card are

compulsory cards. The planning data are shown in Table 4-3.

Table 4-3 Planning Data for the VDSL Data Service in the 1:1 Translation Mode

Item Description Example

Configuring the

uplink service

VLAN

Service Name

Configure this item according to the

network planning of the operator.

The service name should contain

no more than 30 characters.

data3

Starting VLAN ID

The starting VLAN ID of the

service. Value range: 1 to 4095

(excluding 4088, 4089, and 4092).

The starting VLAN ID should not be

larger than the ending VLAN ID.

1000

Ending VLAN ID

The ending VLAN ID of the service.

Value range: 1 to 4095 (excluding

4088, 4089, and 4092). The

starting VLAN ID should not be

larger than the ending VLAN ID.

1000

Port No. / Trunk Group ID

The port number of the uplink

service VLAN or the Trunk ground

number.

GE1

4-50 Version: B/1

Page 191: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

4 Configuring Data Services

Table 4-3 Planning Data for the VDSL Data Service in the 1:1 Translation Mode (Continued)

Item Description Example

Port Tag / Untag

The uplink service VLAN tag

processing mode. Two options are

available: tag and untag.

u In the untag mode, the tags of

the uplink packets will be

stripped automatically when

they pass the uplink port and

the packets will be transmitted

in the untag form.

u In the tag mode, the tags of

the uplink data packets will not

be stripped when they pass

the uplink port.

tag

Configuring the

VDSL line basic

profile

Profile NameConfigure this item according to the

network planning of the operator.vdline

Port Mode

The data encapsulation mode.

When the equipment is connected

with the ADSL Modem, select ATM;

otherwise select PTM. The options

include ATM, PTM and ADAPT.

PTM

Standard Profile

The equipment supports eight

standard profiles (8A, 8B, 8C, 8D,

12A, 12B, 17A and 30A) and the

comprehensive mode ALL, so as to

improve its ability to adapt to

complex scenarios. The digital

number in the value stands for the

maximum cut-off frequency, while

the letter stands for the power

features. For example, 17A means

that the maximum cut-off frequency

is 17 MHz and the maximum

downlink Tx power is +14.5 dBm.

Configure this item according to the

network planning of the operator.

The default setting is ALL.

ALL

Version: B/1 4-51

Page 192: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

Table 4-3 Planning Data for the VDSL Data Service in the 1:1 Translation Mode (Continued)

Item Description Example

Psd Shape

Defines the Tx power at each

frequency point. Each group of

definitions makes up a power

spectrum, including A_EU_128,

B7_BT_ANFP, C_138_b, etc.

Configure this item according to the

network planning of the operator.

The default setting is B8_11_

998ADE17_M2x_A.

B8_11_

998ADE17_M2x_

A

MaxTxPowerDn (dBm)

The value ranges from 0.0 to 25.5

(unit: dBm), accurate to one

decimal place. The default setting

is 20.5 dBm.

20.5

MaxTxPowerUp (dBm)

The value ranges from 0.0 to 20.2

(unit: dBm), accurate to one

decimal place. The default setting

is 14.5 dBm.

14.5

RFI Set

Set the start frequency band and

end frequency band for the RFI

notch according to the actual

condition.

-

ToneBlackout SetSet the filtering starting and ending

bands as required.-

Binding VDSL

ports to the VDSL

line basic profile

Slot No.The slot number of the VD32 card

actually used.2

Port No.The port number of the VD32 card

actually used.1 to 32

Profile IdSelect the configured basic VDSL

line profile.vdline

Configuring the

VDSL service

profile

Profile NameConfigure this item according to the

network planning of the operator.vdservice

upRateMode

The options include fixed,

adaptAtStart, and

adaptAtRuntime.

adaptAtStart

downRateMode

The options include fixed,

adaptAtStart, and

adaptAtRuntime.

adaptAtStart

4-52 Version: B/1

Page 193: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

4 Configuring Data Services

Table 4-3 Planning Data for the VDSL Data Service in the 1:1 Translation Mode (Continued)

Item Description Example

Target SNRM Dn (dB)

The value ranges from 0.0 to 31.0

(unit: dB), accurate to one decimal

place. The default setting is 6.0 dB.

6.0

MaxSNRMDnMode

The options include user define

and unlimited. The default setting

is user define.

User define

Max SNRM Dn (dB)

The value ranges from 0.0 to 31.0

(unit: dB), accurate to one decimal

place. The default setting is 31.0.

31.0

Min SNRM Dn (dB)

The value ranges from 0.0 to 31.0

(unit: dB), accurate to one decimal

place. The default setting is 0.0.

0.0

Target SNRM Up (dB)

The value ranges from 0.0 to 31.0

(unit: dB), accurate to one decimal

place. The default setting is 6.0.

6.0

MaxSNRMUpMode

The options include user define

and unlimited. The default setting

is user define.

User define

Max SNRM Up (dB)

The value ranges from 0.0 to 31.0

(unit: dB), accurate to one decimal

place. The default setting is 31.0.

31.0

Min SNRM Up (dB)

The value ranges from 0.0 to 31.0

(unit: dB), accurate to one decimal

place. The default setting is 0.0.

0.0

Max Rate Dn (Kbit/s)

The value range is 64 to 200000;

the unit is kbit/s; and the default

value is 128000.

128000

Min Rate Dn (Kbit/s)

The value range is 0 to 200000; the

unit is kbit/s; and the default value

is 64.

64

Max Rate Up (Kbit/s)

The value range is 64 to 200000;

the unit is kbit/s; and the default

value is 128000.

128000

Min Rate Down (Kbit/s)

The value range is 0 to 200000; the

unit is kbit/s; and the default value

is 64.

64

Max Interleave Delay Dn (ms)The value range is 0 to 63; the unit

is ms; and the default value is 16.16

Version: B/1 4-53

Page 194: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

Table 4-3 Planning Data for the VDSL Data Service in the 1:1 Translation Mode (Continued)

Item Description Example

Max Interleave Delay Up (ms)The value range is 0 to 63; the unit

is ms; and the default value is 16.16

Min INP Dn

The value ranges from 0 to 16

Symbol, and the default value is 0

Symbol.

0 Symbol

Min INP Up

The value ranges from 0 to 16

Symbol, and the default value is 0

Symbol.

0 Symbol

Binding VDSL

ports to the VDSL

service profile

Slot No.The slot number of the VD32 card

actually used.2

Port No.The port number of the VD32 card

actually used.1 to 32

Profile IdSelect the configured VDSL service

profile.vdservice

Configuring the

port rate limiting

profile

Profile Name

Configure this item according to the

network planning of the operator.

The profile name should contain no

more than 20 characters. The

default profile name is NULL.

PORTRATE.

PRF0

US Policing Status

Enables or disables the uplink

Policing status function. The

default setting is Disable.

Enable

US Policing CIR (Kbit/s)

The value range is 64 to 1000000;

the unit is kbit/s; and the default

value is 64.

512

US CBS (Byte)The value ranges from 0 to

4294967294; the unit is Byte.20000

US EBS (Byte)The value ranges from 0 to

4294967294; the unit is Byte.20000

DS Policing Status

Enables or disables the downlink

Policing status function. The

default setting is Disable.

Enable

DS Policing CIR (Kbit/s)

The value range is 64 to 1000000;

the unit is kbit/s; and the default

value is 64.

8000

DS PIR (Kbit/s)The value ranges between 0 and

16777215; the unit is kbit/s.10240

4-54 Version: B/1

Page 195: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

4 Configuring Data Services

Table 4-3 Planning Data for the VDSL Data Service in the 1:1 Translation Mode (Continued)

Item Description Example

Binding VDSL

ports to the rate

limiting profile

Slot No.The slot number of the VD32 card

actually used.2

Port No.The port number of the VD32 card

actually used.1 to 32

Profile IdSelect the configured rate limiting

profile.

PORTRATE.

PRF0

Configuring the

port service

VLAN

Slot NumberThe slot number of the VD32 card

actually used.1

Port NumberThe port number of the VD32 card

actually used.1 to 32

PVC IndexThe PVC in actual use. The value

ranges from 0 to 7.0

Service Type

The service types include unicast

and multicast. Select unicast for the

data service.

Unicast

CVLAN Mode

Configure the CVLAN mode for this

service; the tag mode, the

transparent mode and the

translation mode are supported.

Translation

CVLAN Rule ID

Rules of the CVLAN translation.

When rules are required, this

parameter is the name of the user-

defined rule; when rules are not

required, set this parameter to null.

NULL

CVLAN Settings

TPID The default value is 33024. 33024

VLAN IDThe CVLAN ID, ranging from 1 to

4095.100 to 131

Priority or COS

The CVLAN priority level, ranging

from 0 to 7. 7 stands for the highest

priority level, and 0 the lowest one.

0

Translation

VLAN Settings

VLAN IDThe VLAN ID after translation; the

value ranges from 1 to 4095.200 to 231

Priority or COS

The translation priority level. The

value ranges from 0 to 7. 7 stands

for the highest priority while 0 the

lowest one.

0

TPID 33024 33024

Version: B/1 4-55

Page 196: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

Table 4-3 Planning Data for the VDSL Data Service in the 1:1 Translation Mode (Continued)

Item Description Example

QinQ State

The stacked VLANs. Configure this

item according to the network

planning of the operator. Select

Enable or Disable.

Enable

QinQ Rule ID

The QinQ rules for binding

services. This parameter is the

name of the user-defined rule.

When rules are not required, set

this parameter to null.

NULL

QinQ Settings

Priority or COS

The SVLAN priority, ranging from 0

to 7. 7 stands for the highest

priority level, and 0 the lowest one.

0

VLAN IDThe SVLAN ID, ranging from 1 to

4095.1000

TPID 33024 33024

Enabling the

VDSL port

Slot No.The slot number of the VD32 card

actually used.2

Port No.The port number of the VD32 card

actually used.1 to 32

EnableEnables or disables the VDSL port.

The default setting is Disable.Enable

4.3.44.3.4 Configuration Flow

The configuration flow of the VDSL data service in the 1:1 translation mode is

shown in Figure 4-40.

4-56 Version: B/1

Page 197: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

4 Configuring Data Services

Figure 4-40 The Configuration Flow of the VDSL Data Service in the 1:1 Translation Mode

Version: B/1 4-57

Page 198: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

4.3.54.3.5 Configuring the Uplink Service VLAN

Process the uplink VLAN tags via the AN5006-20's uplink port. The services are

distinguished by their VLAN IDs. The user services whose VLAN IDs are within the

set range will be transmitted to the upper level network by the OLTequipment

AN5116-06B. Vice versa.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE

manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to

bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Data ServiceíMCU Port Service VLAN

to open the MCU Port Service VLAN tab.

4. Click the Add button on the toolbar. In the Enter the number of rows to add

dialog box that appears, type 1 and click OK to add a service VLAN entry.

5. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

6. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,

as shown in Figure 4-41.

Figure 4-41 Configuring the Uplink Service VLAN

4.3.64.3.6 Configuring the VDSL Line Basic Profile

Configure the parameters of the VDSL line basic profile, such as the port mode,

power spectrum profile, and maximum uplink / downlink Tx power.

Precautions

u The VDSL port of the VD32 card supports three transport modes: ATM, PTM,

and self adapting. Here we use the PTM mode as an example.

4-58 Version: B/1

Page 199: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

4 Configuring Data Services

u When the ATM mode is used, the PVC function should be configured and the

VDSL service becomes valid in the PVC. When the PTM mode is used, the

PVC function should not be configured and the VDSL service becomes valid at

the port.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE

manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to

bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common ConfigíProfile Configí

VDSL Line Basic Profile to bring up the VDSL Line Basic Profile tab.

4. Click the Add button on the toolbar, and enter 1 in the Enter the number of

rows to add dialog box that appears. Click OK to create a new VDSL line

profile.

5. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

6. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,

as shown in Figure 4-42.

Figure 4-42 Configuring the VDSL Basic Profile for the VDSL Service in the 1:1 Translation

Mode

4.3.74.3.7 Binding VDSL Ports to the VDSL Line Basic Profile

Bind designated ports to the set VDSL line basic profile, and the ports will control

the data stream according to the transmission rules and the rate limit defined in the

profile.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE

manager.

Version: B/1 4-59

Page 200: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to

bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common ConfigíPort ConfigíVD

Port Bind Basic Profile. Select the VD32 card to be configured in the Select

Object window that appears, and then click OK to open the VD Port Bind

Basic Profile tab.

4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,

as shown in Figure 4-43.

Figure 4-43 Binding VDSL Ports to the VDSL Basic Profile for the VDSL Service in the 1:1

Translation Mode (Completed)

4.3.84.3.8 Configuring the VDSL Service Profile

Configure the VDSL service profile, and set the parameters including the uplink /

downlink rate mode and the uplink / downlink maximum / minimum rate.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE

manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to

bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common ConfigíProfile Configí

VDSL Service Profile to bring up the VDSL Service Profile tab.

4-60 Version: B/1

Page 201: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

4 Configuring Data Services

4. Click the Add button on the toolbar, and enter 1 in the Enter the number of

rows to add dialog box that appears. Click OK to create a new VDSL service

profile.

5. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

6. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,

as shown in Figure 4-44.

Figure 4-44 Configuring the VDSL Service Profile for the VDSL Service in the 1:1 Translation

Mode

4.3.94.3.9 Binding VDSL Ports to the VDSL Service Profile

Bind designated ports to the set VDSL service profile, and the ports will control the

data stream according to the transmission rules and rate limit defined in the profile.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE

manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to

bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common ConfigíPort ConfigíVD

Port Bind Service Profile. Select the VD32 card to be configured in the Select

Object window that appears, and then click OK to open the VD Port Bind

Service Profile tab.

4. Click the Batch Modify button on the toolbar, and select the line VDSL Service

Profile in the Modify in a batch manner dialog box that appears.

5. Select vdservice from the Initial drop-down list, and use the default values for

other parameters. Then click OK.

6. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,

as shown in Figure 4-45.

Version: B/1 4-61

Page 202: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

Figure 4-45 Binding VDSL Ports to the VDSL Service Profile for the VDSL Service in the 1:1

Translation Mode (Completed)

4.3.104.3.10 Configuring the Port Rate Limiting Profile

Configure the port rate limiting profile and set the parameters including uplink /

downlink Policing status and uplink / downlink port assured rate.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE

manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to

bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common ConfigíProfile ConfigíPort

Rate Profile to bring up the Port Rate Profile tab.

4. Click the Add button on the toolbar, and enter 1 in the Enter the number of

rows to add dialog box that appears. Click OK to create a new port rate limiting

profile.

5. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

6. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,

as shown in Figure 4-46.

4-62 Version: B/1

Page 203: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

4 Configuring Data Services

Figure 4-46 Configuring the Port Rate Limiting Profile for the VDSL Service in the 1:1

Translation Mode

4.3.114.3.11 Binding VDSL Ports to the Rate Limiting Profile

Bind designated ports to the set rate limiting profile, and the ports will control the

data stream according to the uplink rate defined in the profile.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE

manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to

bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common ConfigíPort ConfigíPort

Binding Rate Profile. In the Select Object window that appears, select the

VD32 card to be configured, and then click OK to open the Port Binding Rate

Profile tab.

4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,

as shown in Figure 4-47.

Figure 4-47 Binding VDSL Ports to the Rate Limiting Profile for the VDSL Service in the 1:1

Translation Mode (Completed)

Version: B/1 4-63

Page 204: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

4.3.124.3.12 Configuring the Port Service VLAN

Configure the service VLAN for the designated port on the VD32 card based on

unicast service flow.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE

manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to

bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Data ServiceíPort VLAN Config to

open the Port VLAN Config tab.

4. Click VD32 in the left pane, and click PVC Index in the upper-right pane. Then

select all the 32 ports, as shown in Figure 4-48.

Figure 4-48 Selecting the Ports in the 1:1 Translation Mode

5. Click the Add button, and in the Please Select Port & PVC dialog box that

appears, click the >> button to add all the ports to the Selected pane, as shown

in Figure 4-49.

4-64 Version: B/1

Page 205: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

4 Configuring Data Services

Figure 4-49 Selecting the Ports and the PVC to be Added with Data

6. Click OK, and enter 1 in the Enter the number of rows to add dialog box that

appears. Then click OK and return to the Port VLAN Config window.

7. Click the first row in the lower right pane, and then click the Batch Modify

button.

8. In the Batch Modify dialog box that appears, select CVLAN Settings.

9. In the Configuration Item group box, select the line VLAN ID, entering 100 in

the Initial Value field and 1 in the step field.

Note:

When the VLAN ID values increase or decrease regularly, set the Step to

the difference between two successive values. The item Redot refers to

the count of repeated values prior to calculation of the increment.

10. Select the line Priority or COS, and select 0 from the Initial Value drop-down

list. Use the default values for other parameters.

Version: B/1 4-65

Page 206: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

11. Select the line TPID, and enter 33024 in the Initial Value field. Use default

values for other parameters, as shown in Figure 4-50.

Figure 4-50 Modifying the CVLAN Settings in a Batch Manner in the 1:1 Translation Mode

12. Configure other parameters according to the planning data.

13. Return to the Port VLAN Config window, and click the Create on Device

button on the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown in Figure 4-51.

4-66 Version: B/1

Page 207: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

4 Configuring Data Services

Figure 4-51 The Port Service VLAN Configuration Completed in the 1:1 Translation Mode

4.3.134.3.13 Enabling the VDSL Ports

Enable the VDSL ports. The port will be unable to receive and transmit data when

disabled.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE

manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to

bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common ConfigíPort ConfigíPort

Enable. Select the VD32 card to be configured in the Select Object window

that appears, and then click OK to open the Port Enable tab.

4. Click the Batch Modify button, and select the line Enable in the Modify in a

batch manner dialog box.

Version: B/1 4-67

Page 208: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

5. Select Enable from the Initial drop-down list, and click OK, as shown in

Figure 4-52.

Figure 4-52 Enabling VDSL Ports for VDSL Services in the 1:1 Translation Mode

6. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,

as shown in Figure 4-53.

Figure 4-53 Enabling the VDSL Ports for the VDSL Service in the 1:1 Translation Mode

(Completed)

4.3.144.3.14 Configuration Result

PC1 to PC32 can access Internet after the configuration is completed.

4-68 Version: B/1

Page 209: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

4 Configuring Data Services

4.44.4 Example of Configuring the VDSL DataService in the N:1 Translation Mode

The following introduces how to configure the VDSL data service in the N:1

translation mode.

4.4.14.4.1 Configuration Rules

u The VD32 card provides 32 VDSL user ports, and one VDSL port corresponds

to eight PVCs. One PVC can be configured with up to 16 subscriber services.

One VDSL port can also be configured with up to 16 subscriber services; that is,

the subscriber services are shared among the PVCs.

u The VDSL port of the VD32 card supports three transport modes: ATM, PTM,

and self adapting. Here we use the PTM mode as an example.

u When the ATM mode is used, the PVC function should be configured and the

VDSL service becomes valid in the PVC. When the PTM mode is used, the

PVC function should not be configured and the VDSL service becomes valid at

the port.

u The equipment supports four processing modes, i.e. Tag, transparent, 1:1

translation, and N:1 translation, for the Ethernet frame uplinked from the

subscriber end. The example is configured in the N:1 translation mode.

u When the VD32 card is used as the service interface card, the Ethernet frame

uplinked from the user side is added with the VLAN Tag via the user’s intelligent

switch or a home gateway with the ADSL uplink port. And then the VLAN ID is

translated into another valid VLAN ID by the equipment; each user VLAN ID is

translated into the same VLAN ID. After that, the service is added with the

SVLAN Tag and transmitted to the upper layer network.

u The user-defined COS value becomes invalid in the N:1 translation mode, and

the system will use the COS value carried by the tag in the original messages

by default.

Version: B/1 4-69

Page 210: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

4.4.24.4.2 Network Diagram

Service Planning

Use the AD32 card of the AN5006-20 to access 1 data services.

Network Diagram

Figure 4-54 Network Diagram for the VDSL Data Service in the N:1 Translation Mode

The AN5006-20 translates the CVLAN tags 100 to 101 on the terminal side into the

CVLAN tag 200, add the SVLAN tag 1000 to them, and then send the data to the

upper layer network. In the downlink direction, the reverse process takes place.

Hardware Configuration

The equipment can access data services in the transparent transmission mode

using the AD32, AD64, CASA or VD32 cards. In this example, an VD32 card is used.

4.4.34.4.3 Planning Data

The VD32 card of the AN5006-20 acts as the client end interface card. The

management control card, the PWRB card and the FANB card are compulsory. The

planning data are shown in Table 4-4.

4-70 Version: B/1

Page 211: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

4 Configuring Data Services

Table 4-4 Planning Data of the VDSL Data Service in the N:1 Translation Mode

Item Description Example

Configuring Uplink

Service VLAN

Service Name

Configure according to the network planning

of the operator. The maximum length of the

service name is 30 characters.

data4

Starting VLAN ID

The starting value of the service VLAN ID.

The value ranges from 1 to 4095 (excluding

4088, 4089, and 4092). The starting VLAN ID

should not be larger than the ending VLAN

ID.

1000

VLAN ID End

The ending value of the service VLAN ID.

The value ranges from 1 to 4095 (excluding

4088, 4089, and 4092). The starting VLAN ID

should not be larger than the ending VLAN

ID.

1000

Port number or the

trunk group ID

The port number of the uplink service VLAN

or the Trunk group number.GE1

Port Tag/Untag

Set the VLAN tag attribute of the uplink

service. The attribute includes untag or tag.

u In the UNTAG mode, the tags of the

uplink packets will be stripped

automatically when they pass the port

and the packets will be uplinked in the

untag form, while the downlink untag

packets will be added with designated

tags when they pass the port.

u In the TAG mode, the tags of the uplink /

downlink data packets will not be

processed when they pass the port.

tag

Configuring the Basic

Profile of the VDSL

Line

Profile NameConfigure according to the network planning

of the operator.vdline

Port Mode

The data encapsulation mode. When the

equipment is connected with the ADSL

Modem, select ATM; otherwise select PTM.

Includes ATM, PTM, and self adapting.

PTM

Version: B/1 4-71

Page 212: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

Table 4-4 Planning Data of the VDSL Data Service in the N:1 Translation Mode (Continued)

Item Description Example

Standard profile

The equipment supports eight standard

profiles (8A, 8B, 8C, 8D, 12A, 12B, 17A and

30A) and the comprehensive mode ALL, so

as to improve the ability to adapt to complex

scenarios. Among them, the digital number

means the maximum cut-off frequency, and

the letter means the power attribute. For

example, 17A means that the maximum cut-

off frequency is 17 MHz and the maximum

downlink Tx power is +14.5 dBm.

Configure according to the network planning

of the operator. The default setting is ALL.

ALL

Power Spectrum

Profile

Defines the Tx power at each frequency

point. Each group of definition indicates one

power spectrum, including A_EU_128, B7_

BT_ANFP, C_138_b, etc.

Configure according to the network planning

of the operator. The default setting is B8_11_

998ADE17_M2x_A.

B8_11_998ADE17_

M2x_A

Down Max Tx Power

The value range is from 0.0 to 25.5 (unit:

dBm) with a measurement carried to one

decimal place. The default setting is 20.5.

20.5

Max Tx power Up

The value range is from 0.0 to 20.2 (unit:

dBm) with a measurement carried to one

decimal place. The default setting is 14.5

dBm.

14.5

Slot Band Config Sets the starting and ending bands of slot. -

Filtering Band ConfigSets the starting and ending bands of

filtering.-

Binding an VDSL Port

to the VDSL Line

Basic Profile

Slot No.The slot number of the VD32 card in actual

use.2

Port No.The port number of the VD32 card in actual

use.1

VDSL Line Profile The configured VDSL line profile. vdline

Configuring the VDSL

Service Profile

Profile NameConfigure according to the network planning

of the operator.vdservice

Up Rate ModeThe options include fixed, adaptAtStart, and

adaptAtRuntime.adaptAtStart

4-72 Version: B/1

Page 213: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

4 Configuring Data Services

Table 4-4 Planning Data of the VDSL Data Service in the N:1 Translation Mode (Continued)

Item Description Example

Down Rate ModeThe options include fixed, adaptAtStart, and

adaptAtRuntime.adaptAtStart

Target SNRMDn (dB)

The value range is from 0.0 to 31.0 (unit: dB)

with a measurement carried to one decimal

place. The default setting is 6.0.

6.0

Max SNRMDn ModeIncludes User Defined and No Limit. The

default value is User Defined.User Defined

Max SNRMDn (dB)

The value range is from 0.0 to 31.0 (unit: dB)

with a measurement carried to one decimal

place. The default setting is 31.0.

31.0

Min SNRMDn (dB)

The value range is from 0.0 to 31.0 (unit: dB)

with a measurement carried to one decimal

place. The default setting is 0.0.

0.0

Target SNRMUp (dB)

The value range is from 0.0 to 31.0 (unit: dB)

with a measurement carried to one decimal

place. The default setting is 6.0.

6.0

Max. Target SNRM

Up

Includes User Defined and No Limit. The

default value is User Defined.User Defined

Max SNRMUp (dB)

The value range is from 0.0 to 31.0 (unit: dB)

with a measurement carried to one decimal

place. The default setting is 31.0.

31.0

Min SNRMUp (dB)

The value range is from 0.0 to 31.0 (unit: dB)

with a measurement carried to one decimal

place. The default setting is 0.0.

0.0

Max Rate DownThe value range is 64 to 200000; the unit is

kbit/s; and the default value is 128000.128000

Min Rate DownThe value range is 0 to 200000; the unit is

kbit/s; and the default value is 64.64

Max Rate UpThe value range is 64 to 200000; the unit is

kbit/s; and the default value is 128000.128000

Min Rate DownThe value range is 0 to 200000; the unit is

kbit/s; and the default value is 64.64

MaxInterleaveDe-

layDn (ms)

The value range is 0 to 63; the unit is ms;

and the default value is 16ms.16

MaxInterleaveDelay-

Up (ms)

The value range is 0 to 63; the unit is ms;

and the default value is 16ms.16

MinINPDnThe value ranges from 0 to 16 Symbol, and

the default value is 0 Symbol.0 Symbol

Version: B/1 4-73

Page 214: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

Table 4-4 Planning Data of the VDSL Data Service in the N:1 Translation Mode (Continued)

Item Description Example

MinINPUpThe value ranges from 0 to 16 Symbol, and

the default value is 0 Symbol.0 Symbol

Binding a VDSL Port

to the VDSL Service

Profile

Slot No.The slot number of the VD32 card in actual

use.2

Port No.The port number of the VD32 card in actual

use.1

VDSL Service Profile Select the configured VDSL service profile. vdservice

Configuring Port Rate

Limiting Profile

Profile Name

Configure according to the network planning

of the operator. The maximum length of the

profile name is 20 characters. The default

profile name is NULL.

PORTRATE.PRF0

Uplink Policing statusEnables or disables the uplink Policing status

function. The default value is Disable.Enable

Uplink Port CIR

(Kbit/s)

The value range is 64 to 1000000; the unit is

kbit/s; and the default value is 64kbit/s.512

US CBS (Byte)The value range is from 0 to 4294967294.

The unit is Byte.2000

Uplink Excess Burst

Size (Byte)

The value range is from 0 to 4294967294.

The unit is Byte.2000

DS Policing statusEnables or disables the downlink Policing

status function. The default value is Disable.Enable

DS Policing CIR

(Kbit/s)

The value range is 64 to 1000000; the unit is

kbit/s; and the default value is 64kbit/s.8000

DS PIR (Kbit/s)The value range is from 0 to 16777215. The

unit is kbit/s.10240

Binding a VDSL Port

to the Rate Limiting

Profile

Slot No.The slot number of the VD32 card in actual

use.2

Port No.The port number of the VD32 card in actual

use.1

Profile ID Select the configured rate limiting profile. PORTRATE.PRF0

Configuring a Port

Service VLAN

Slot No.The slot number of the VD32 card in actual

use.2

Port No.The port number of the VD32 card in actual

use.1

PVC indexThe PVC in actual use. The value range is

from 0 to 7.0

Service TypeThe service type, including unicast and

multicast. The data service is unicast.unicast

4-74 Version: B/1

Page 215: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

4 Configuring Data Services

Table 4-4 Planning Data of the VDSL Data Service in the N:1 Translation Mode (Continued)

Item Description Example

CVLAN Mode

The CVLAN mode for this service. The tag

mode, the transparent mode, and the

translation mode are supported.

Translation

CVlan Rule ID

Rules of the CVLAN translation. When rules

are required, this parameter is the name of

the user-defined rule; when rules are not

required, set this parameter to null.

NULL

CVlan TPID The default setting is 33024. 33024

CVLAN ID The CVLAN ID, ranging from 1 to 4095. 100 to 101

CVLAN priority

The CVLAN priority level. The value ranges

from 0 to 7, and 7 is the highest priority while

0 is the lowest priority.

0

TTPID The default setting is 33024. 33024

Translation IDThe VLAN ID after translation; the value

ranges from 1 to 4095.200

Translation priority

The translation priority level. The value

ranges from 0 to 7, and 7 is the highest

priority while 0 is the lowest priority.

0

QinQ Enable

The stacked VLANs, configured according to

the operator’s network planning. Select

Enable or Disable.

Enable

QinQ Rule ID

The QinQ rules for binding services. This

parameter is the name of the user-defined

rule. When rules are not required, set this

parameter to null.

NULL

QinQ TPID The default setting is 33024. 33024

QINQ VLAN ID The SVLAN ID, ranging from 1 to 4095. 1000

QINQ priority

The SVLAN priority level. The value ranges

from 0 to 7, and 7 is the highest priority while

0 is the lowest priority.

0

Enabling the VDSL

Port

Slot No.The slot number of the VD32 card in actual

use.2

Port No.The port number of the VD32 card in actual

use.1

ENABLEFLAGEnables or disables the VDSL port. The

default setting is Disable.Enable

Version: B/1 4-75

Page 216: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

4.4.44.4.4 Configuration Flow

The configuration flow of the VDSL data service in the N:1 translation mode is

shown in Figure 4-55.

Figure 4-55 The Configuration Flow of the VDSL Data Service in the N:1 Translation Mode

4-76 Version: B/1

Page 217: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

4 Configuring Data Services

4.4.54.4.5 Configuring the Uplink Service VLAN

Process the uplink VLAN tags via the AN5006-20's uplink port. The services are

distinguished by their VLAN IDs. The user services whose VLAN IDs are within the

set range will be transmitted to the upper level network by the OLTequipment

AN5116-06B. Vice versa.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE

manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to

bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Data ServiceíMCU Port Service VLAN

to open the MCU Port Service VLAN tab.

4. Click the Add button on the toolbar. In the Enter the number of rows to add

dialog box that appears, type 1 and click OK to add a service VLAN entry.

5. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

6. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,

as shown in Figure 4-56.

Figure 4-56 Configuring the Uplink Service VLAN

4.4.64.4.6 Configuring the VDSL Line Basic Profile

Configure the parameters of the VDSL line basic profile, such as the port mode,

power spectrum profile, and maximum uplink / downlink Tx power.

Precautions

u The VDSL port of the VD32 card supports three transport modes: ATM, PTM,

and self adapting. Here we use the PTM mode as an example.

Version: B/1 4-77

Page 218: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

u When the ATM mode is used, the PVC function should be configured and the

VDSL service becomes valid in the PVC. When the PTM mode is used, the

PVC function should not be configured and the VDSL service becomes valid at

the port.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE

manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to

bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common ConfigíProfile Configí

VDSL Line Basic Profile to bring up the VDSL Line Basic Profile tab.

4. Click the Add button on the toolbar, and enter 1 in the Enter the number of

rows to add dialog box that appears. Click OK to create a new VDSL line

profile.

5. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

6. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,

as shown in Figure 4-57.

Figure 4-57 Configuring the VDSL Basic Line Profile for the VDSL Service in the N:1

Translation Mode

4.4.74.4.7 Binding VDSL Ports to the VDSL Line Basic Profile

Bind designated ports to the set VDSL line basic profile, and the ports will control

the data stream according to the transmission rules and the rate limit defined in the

profile.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE

manager.

4-78 Version: B/1

Page 219: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

4 Configuring Data Services

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to

bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common ConfigíPort ConfigíVD

Port Bind Basic Profile. Select the VD32 card to be configured in the Select

Object window that appears, and then click OK to open the VD Port Bind

Basic Profile tab.

4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,

as shown in Figure 4-58.

Figure 4-58 Binding VDSL Ports to the VDSL Basic Line Profile for the VDSL Service in the

N:1 Translation Mode (Completed)

4.4.84.4.8 Configuring the VDSL Service Profile

Configure the VDSL service profile, and set the parameters including the uplink /

downlink rate mode and the uplink / downlink maximum / minimum rate.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE

manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to

bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common ConfigíProfile Configí

VDSL Service Profile to bring up the VDSL Service Profile tab.

Version: B/1 4-79

Page 220: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

4. Click the Add button on the toolbar, and enter 1 in the Enter the number of

rows to add dialog box that appears. Click OK to create a new VDSL service

profile.

5. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

6. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,

as shown in Figure 4-59.

Figure 4-59 Configuring the VDSL Profile for the VDSL Service in the N:1 Translation Mode

4.4.94.4.9 Binding VDSL Ports to the VDSL Service Profile

Bind designated ports to the set VDSL service profile, and the ports will control the

data stream according to the transmission rules and rate limit defined in the profile.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE

manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to

bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common ConfigíPort ConfigíVD

Port Bind Service Profile. Select the VD32 card to be configured in the Select

Object window that appears, and then click OK to open the VD Port Bind

Service Profile tab.

4. Click the Batch Modify button on the toolbar, and select the line VDSL Service

Profile in the Modify in a batch manner dialog box that appears.

5. Select vdservice from the Initial drop-down list, and use the default values for

other parameters. Then click OK.

6. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,

as shown in Figure 4-60.

4-80 Version: B/1

Page 221: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

4 Configuring Data Services

Figure 4-60 Binding VDSL Ports to the VDSL Service Profile for the VDSL Service in the N:1

Translation Mode (Completed)

4.4.104.4.10 Configuring the Port Rate Limiting Profile

Configure the port rate limiting profile and set the parameters including uplink /

downlink Policing status and uplink / downlink port assured rate.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE

manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to

bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common ConfigíProfile ConfigíPort

Rate Profile to bring up the Port Rate Profile tab.

4. Click the Add button on the toolbar, and enter 1 in the Enter the number of

rows to add dialog box that appears. Click OK to create a new port rate limiting

profile.

5. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

6. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,

as shown in Figure 4-61.

Version: B/1 4-81

Page 222: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

Figure 4-61 Configuring the Port Rate Limiting Profile for the VDSL Service in the N:1

Translation Mode

4.4.114.4.11 Binding VDSL Ports to the Rate Limiting Profile

Bind designated ports to the set rate limiting profile, and the ports will control the

data stream according to the uplink rate defined in the profile.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE

manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to

bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common ConfigíPort ConfigíPort

Binding Rate Profile. In the Select Object window that appears, select the

VD32 card to be configured, and then click OK to open the Port Binding Rate

Profile tab.

4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,

as shown in Figure 4-62

4-82 Version: B/1

Page 223: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

4 Configuring Data Services

Figure 4-62 Binding VDSL Ports to the Rate Limiting Profile for the VDSL Service in the N:1

Translation Mode (Completed)

4.4.124.4.12 Configuring the Port Service VLAN

Configure the service VLAN for the designated port on the VD32 card based on

unicast service flow.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE

manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to

bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Data ServiceíPort VLAN Config to

open the Port VLAN Config tab.

4. Click VD32 in the left pane, and select the line with the Port Number 1 in the

upper-right pane.

5. Click Add, and enter 1 in the Enter the number of rows to add dialog box that

appears. Then click OK and return to the Port VLAN Config window.

6. Configure other parameters according to the planning data.

7. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,

as shown in Figure 4-63.

Version: B/1 4-83

Page 224: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

Figure 4-63 The Port Service VLAN Configuration Completed in the N:1 Translation Mode

4.4.134.4.13 Enabling the VDSL Ports

Enable the VDSL ports. When disabled, the ports will be unable to receive or

transmit data.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE

manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to

bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common ConfigíPort ConfigíPort

Enable. Select the VD32 card to be configured in the Select Object window

that appears, and then click OK to open the Port Enable tab.

4. Click the entry of port No.1, and select Enable in the drop-down list of the

ENABLEFLAG.

4-84 Version: B/1

Page 225: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

4 Configuring Data Services

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,

as shown in Figure 4-64.

Figure 4-64 Enabling the VDSL Ports for the VDSL Service in the N:1 Translation Mode

(Completed)

4.4.144.4.14 Configuration Result

PC1 and PC2 can access Internet after the configuration is completed.

Version: B/1 4-85

Page 226: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device
Page 227: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

55 Configuring the G.SHDSL Service

The following introduces how to access the G.SHDSL service in the ATM and TDM

modes for the AN5006-20.

Example of Configuring the G.SHDSL Service Based on ATM

Example of Configuring the G.SHDSL Service Based on TDM (Local Mode)

Version: B/1 5-1

Page 228: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

5.15.1 Example of Configuring the G.SHDSL ServiceBased on ATM

The following introduces how to configure the G.SHDSL service in the transparent

transmission mode based on ATM.

5.1.15.1.1 Configuration Rules

ATM is a packet switch and multiplex technology based on cell. It is applicable in

LAN and WAN, with the features of fixed-length cell, connection-oriented, and good

real time performance, suitable for for the applications with high bandwidth, low

delay, and high data burst rate.

When users use the HD32A card as the service interface card, the Ethernet frames

uplinked from the user side are added with the CVLAN Tags via an intelligent switch

or a CPE uplinked with the SHDSL. Then the AN5006-20 transparently transmits

the Ethernet frames, adds SVLAN Tags to them, and uplinks them to the providers

network.

5.1.25.1.2 Network Diagram

Service Planning

Access 31 G.SHDSL services based on the ATM via the HD32A card of the

AN5006-20 (the ports 1 and 2 are bound together as a group to provide larger

bandwidth for PC1).

5-2 Version: B/1

Page 229: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

5 Configuring the G.SHDSL Service

Network Diagram

Figure 5-1 Network Diagram of the G.SHDSL Service in the ATM Transparent Mode

The AN5006-20 transparently transmits the inner CVLAN tags 800 to 830 on the

terminal side, adds the outer SVLAN tag 1000, and then transmits the data to the

providers network. In the downlink direction, the reverse process takes place.

Hardware Configuration

The equipment uses the HD32A card to access the G.SHDSL service. In this

example, an HD32A card is used.

5.1.35.1.3 Planning Data

The HD32A card in Slot 4 of the AN5006-20 acts as the subscriber side interface

card, and the management control card, the PWRB card, and the FANB card are

compulsory. The planning data are shown in Table 5-1. Here the MCUA card acts

as the management control card.

Table 5-1 Planning Data for the G.SHDSL Service in the ATM Transparent Transmission

Mode

Item Description Example

Configuring the uplink

port attributesSlot No.

The slot number of the MCUA card in

actual use.5

Version: B/1 5-3

Page 230: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

Table 5-1 Planning Data for the G.SHDSL Service in the ATM Transparent Transmission

Mode (Continued)

Item Description Example

Port No.

The port number of the MCUA card in

actual use, including the GE1, GE2, GE3

and GE4 uplink ports.

GE3

Port TypeThe port type of the uplink card in actual

use.GE port

Auto-negotiation

Enables or disables the auto negotiation

function of the uplink port. It is not allowed

to disable the auto negotiation function of

the 10GE port.

Enable

Port Rate

The port rate of the uplink port. The default

values of the 10GE and GE ports are

10000 Mbps and 1000 Mbps respectively.

1000Mbps

Port duplex mode

The duplex mode of the uplink port,

including full duplex and half duplex. Full

duplex is the default value.

Full duplex

Port flow control

Enables or disables the flow control

function of the uplink port. It is enabled

when this item is selected, and disabled

when this item is cleared. The default

setting is Disable.

Disable

Port address

learning

Enables or disables the address learning

function of the uplink port. It is enabled

when this item is selected, and disabled

when this item is cleared. Enabled by

default.

Enable

Port priority

Enables or disables the priority function of

the uplink port. It is enabled when this item

is selected, and disabled when this item is

cleared. Enabled by default.

Enable

Port priority value

The service priority value of the uplink port,

ranging from 0 to 7. 7 stands for the highest

priority level, and 0 the lowest level. The

default setting is 0.

0

5-4 Version: B/1

Page 231: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

5 Configuring the G.SHDSL Service

Table 5-1 Planning Data for the G.SHDSL Service in the ATM Transparent Transmission

Mode (Continued)

Item Description Example

Interface mode

The interface mode of the uplink port,

including SerDes and SGMII. The default

value is SerDes. SerDes should be

configured if the uplink port is using an

optical module or a compulsory GE

electrical module. SGMII should be

configured if the uplink port is using a

10/100/1000Mbps electrical module.

SerDes

Enabling the SHDSL

port

Slot No.The slot number of the HD32A card in

actual use.4

Port No.The port number of the HD32A card in

actual use.1 to 32

EnableEnables or disables the SHDSL port. The

default setting is Disable.Enable

Enabling the port

PVC

Slot NumberThe slot number of the HD32A card in

actual use.4

Port NumberThe port number of the HD32A card in

actual use.1 to 32

PVC IndexThe PVC index number. The value ranges

from 0 to 7.0

PVC EnableEnables or disables the PVC. The default

setting is Disable.Enable

Configuring the uplink

service VLAN

Service Name

Configure this item according to the

network planning of the operator. The

service name should contain no more than

30 characters.

Data

Starting VLAN IDThe starting VLAN ID of the uplink port

service. The value ranges from 1 to 4095.1000

Ending VLAN ID

The ending VLAN ID of the uplink port

service. The value ranges from 1 to 4095.

The starting VLAN ID should not be larger

than the ending VLAN ID.

1000

Port No. / Trunk

Group ID

The port number of the uplink service

VLAN or the Trunk ground number.5:GE3

Version: B/1 5-5

Page 232: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

Table 5-1 Planning Data for the G.SHDSL Service in the ATM Transparent Transmission

Mode (Continued)

Item Description Example

Port Tag / Untag

The uplink service VLAN tag processing

mode. Two options are available: tag and

untag.

u In the untag mode, the tags of the

uplink packets will be stripped

automatically when they pass the

uplink port and the packets will be

transmitted in the untag form.

u In the tag mode, the tags of the uplink

data packets will not be stripped when

they pass the uplink port.

tag

Configuring an

SHDSL line profile

Profile NameConfigure according to the network

planning of the operator.ShdslATM

Port Mode

Configure this item according to the

network planning of the operator. The

options include ATM and TDM.

ATM

Code Type

Configure this item according to the

network planning of the operator. The

options include PAM16, PAM32, and Auto.

PAM32

Transmission

standard

Configure this item according to the

network planning of the operator. The

options include Annex A and Annex B.

Annex B

Target SNR Margin

Down (dB)

The value range is -10 to 21; the unit is dB;

and the default value is 6dB.6

Insure SNR Margin

Down (DB)

The value ranges from -10 to 21; the unit is

dB; and the default value is 3dB.3

Uplink target signal-

to-noise ratio (DB)

The value range is -10 to 21; the unit is dB;

and the default value is 6dB.6

Target SNR Margin

Up (DB)

The value ranges from -10 to 21; the unit is

dB; and the default value is 3dB.3

Line Probe EnableEnables or disables the line detection

function. The default setting is disable.Disable

Binding SHDSL ports

to the SHDSL line

profile

Slot No.The slot number of the HD32A card in

actual use.4

Port No.The port number of the HD32A card in

actual use.1 to 32

Profile ID The configured SHDSL line profile. ShdslATM

5-6 Version: B/1

Page 233: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

5 Configuring the G.SHDSL Service

Table 5-1 Planning Data for the G.SHDSL Service in the ATM Transparent Transmission

Mode (Continued)

Item Description Example

Configuring the PVC

profile

Profile Name

Configure according to the network

planning of the operator. The maximum

length is 20 characters. The default value is

defaultPvcPrf.

defaultPvcPrf

PVCNOThe PVC index number. The value ranges

from 0 to 7.0

VPIThe value ranges from 0 to 255, and the

default value is 8.8

VCIThe value range is 0 and 32 to 65535; the

default value is 35.35

Binding SHDSL ports

to the PVC profile

Slot No.The slot number of the HD32A card

actually used.4

Port No.The port number of the HD32A card

actually used.1 to 32

Profile Id Select the configured PVC profile. defaultPvcPrf

Configuring the port

rate limiting profile

Profile Name

Configure this item according to the

network planning of the operator. The

profile name should contain no more than

20 characters. The default profile name is

NULL.

PORTRATE.PRF0

US Policing Status

Enables or disables the uplink Policing

status function. The default setting is

Disable.

Enable

US Policing CIR

(Kbit/s)

The value range is 64 to 1000000; the unit

is kbit/s; and the default value is 64kbit/s.51200

US CBS (Byte)The value ranges from 0 to 4294967294;

the unit is Byte.20000

US EBS (Byte)The value ranges from 0 to 4294967294;

the unit is Byte.20000

DS Policing Status

Enables or disables the downlink Policing

status function. The default setting is

Disable.

Enable

DS Policing CIR

(Kbit/s)

The value range is 64 to 1000000; the unit

is kbit/s; and the default value is 64kbit/s.51200

DS PIR (Kbit/s)The value ranges between 0 and

16777215; the unit is kbit/s.10240

Version: B/1 5-7

Page 234: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

Table 5-1 Planning Data for the G.SHDSL Service in the ATM Transparent Transmission

Mode (Continued)

Item Description Example

Binding SHDSL ports

to the rate limiting

profile

Slot No.The slot number of the HD32A card

actually used.4

Port No.The port number of the HD32A card

actually used.1 to 32

Profile Id Select the configured rate limiting profile. PORTRATE.PRF0

Configuring the

SHDSL port bound

group

M-Pair Group IdThis ID is automatically generated by the

system.-

Slot No.The slot number of the HD32A card

actually used.4

Master Port No.Configure this item according to the

network planning of the operator.1

Slave Port No.Configure this item according to the

network planning of the operator.2

Configuring the port

service VLAN

Slot No.The slot number of the HD32A card

actually used.4

Port NumberThe port number of the HD32A card

actually used.1 to 32

PVC IndexThe PVC in actual use. The value ranges

from 0 to 7.0

Service Type

The service types include unicast and

multicast. Select unicast for the data

service.

Unicast

CVLAN Mode

Configure the CVLAN mode for this

service; the tag mode, the transparent

mode and the translation mode are

supported.

Transparent

CVLAN Rule ID

Rules of the CVLAN translation. When

rules are required, this parameter is the

name of the user-defined rule; when rules

are not required, set this parameter to null.

null

TPID The default setting is 33024. 33024

VLAN ID The CVLAN ID, ranging from 1 to 4095. 800 to 830

Priority or COS

The CVLAN priority level, ranging from 0 to

7. 7 stands for the highest priority level, and

0 the lowest one.

0

5-8 Version: B/1

Page 235: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

5 Configuring the G.SHDSL Service

Table 5-1 Planning Data for the G.SHDSL Service in the ATM Transparent Transmission

Mode (Continued)

Item Description Example

QinQ State

The stacked VLANs. Configure this item

according to the network planning of the

operator. Select Enable or Disable.

Enable

QinQ Rule ID

The QinQ rules for binding services. This

parameter is the name of the user-defined

rule. When rules are not required, set this

parameter to null.

null

QinQ TPID The default setting is 33024. 33024

QINQ VLAN ID The SVLAN ID, ranging from 1 to 4095. 1000

QINQ priority

The SVLAN priority, ranging from 0 to 7. 7

is the highest priority level, and 0 is the

lowest one.

0

5.1.45.1.4 Configuration Flow

The flow of configuring the G.SHDSL service in the ATM transparent mode is shown

in Figure 5-2.

Version: B/1 5-9

Page 236: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

Figure 5-2 Configuration Flow of G.SHDSL Service - ATM Transparent Mode

5-10 Version: B/1

Page 237: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

5 Configuring the G.SHDSL Service

5.1.55.1.5 Configuring the Uplink Port Attributes

Configure the uplink port attributes, including parameters such as auto-negotiation

switch, the port flow control, and the port priority.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE

manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to

bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Data ServiceíMCU Ethernet Port to

open the MCU Ethernet Port tab.

4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,

as shown in Figure 5-3.

Figure 5-3 Configuring Uplink Port Properties for the SHDSL Service in the ATM Transparent

Transmission Mode

5.1.65.1.6 Enabling an SHDSL Port

Enable the SHDSL port. When disabled, the ports will be unable to receive or

transmit data.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE

manager.

Version: B/1 5-11

Page 238: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to

bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common ConfigíPort ConfigíPort

Enable. Select the HD32A card to be configured in the Select Object window

that appears, and then click OK.

4. Click the Batch Modify button, and select the Enable check box in the Modify

in a batch manner dialog box.

5. Select Enable from the Initial drop-down list, and click OK, as shown in

Figure 5-4.

Figure 5-4 Enabling SHDSL Ports for the SHDSL Service in the ATM Transparent

Transmission Mode

6. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,

as shown in Figure 5-5.

5-12 Version: B/1

Page 239: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

5 Configuring the G.SHDSL Service

Figure 5-5 Enabling the SHDSL Port for the SHDSL Service in the ATM Transparent Mode

(Completed)

5.1.75.1.7 Enabling the Port PVC

Enable the port PVC.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE

manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to

bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree, select Common ConfigíPVC Enable. Select the

HD32A card to be configured in the Select Object window that appears, and

then click OK to open the PVC Enable tab.

4. Click the Batch Modify button on the toolbar. In the Modify in a batch manner

dialog box that appears, select the line PVC Enable, and enter 64 in the

Repeat field. Then select Enable from the drop-down list of Initial, and enter 0

in the Step field. Use the default settings for other parameters, as shown in

Figure 5-6.

Version: B/1 5-13

Page 240: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

Figure 5-6 Enabling PVC for Multiple Ports in a Batch Manner - G.SHDSL Service

Configuration

5. Click OK and return to the PVC Enable window. Click theWrite to Device

button on the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown in Figure 5-7.

Figure 5-7 Enabling Port PVC for the SHDSL Service in the Transparent Mode (Completed)

5-14 Version: B/1

Page 241: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

5 Configuring the G.SHDSL Service

5.1.85.1.8 Configuring the Uplink Service VLAN

Process the uplink VLAN tags via the AN5006-20's uplink port. The services are

distinguished by their VLAN IDs. The user services whose VLAN IDs are within the

set range will be transmitted to the upper level network by the OLTequipment

AN5116-06B. Vice versa.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE

manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to

bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Data ServiceíMCU Port Service VLAN

to open the MCU Port Service VLAN tab.

4. Click the Add button on the toolbar. In the Enter the number of rows to add

dialog box that appears, type 1 and click OK to add a service VLAN entry.

5. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

6. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,

as shown in Figure 5-8.

Figure 5-8 Configuring the Uplink Service VLAN for the G.SHDSL Service in the ATM

Transparent Transmission Mode

5.1.95.1.9 Configuring an SHDSL Line Profile

Configure basic parameters of the SHDSL line profile, such as port mode, line

encoding type and line transmission mode.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE

manager.

Version: B/1 5-15

Page 242: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to

bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common ConfigProfile ConfigSHDSL

Line Profile to open the SHDSL Line Profile tab.

4. Click the Add button on the toolbar, and enter 1 in the Enter the number of

rows to add dialog box that appears. Click OK to create a new SHDSL line

profile.

5. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

6. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,

as shown in Figure 5-9.

Figure 5-9 Configuring the SHDSL Line Profile for the G.SHDSL Service in the ATM

Transparent Mode

5.1.105.1.10 Binding SHDSL Ports to the SHDSL Line Profile

Bind designated ports to the set SHDSL line profile, and the ports will control data

stream according to the transmission rules and the rate limit defined in the profile.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE

manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to

bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common ConfigíSHDSL Port Binding

Line Profile. Select the HD32A card to be configured in the Select Object

window that appears, and then click OK to open the SHDSL Port Binding Line

Profile tab.

4. Click the Batch Modify button on the toolbar, and select the line Profile ID in

the Modify in a batch manner dialog box that appears.

5-16 Version: B/1

Page 243: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

5 Configuring the G.SHDSL Service

5. Select ShdslATM from the Initial drop-down list, and use the default values for

other parameters. Then click OK, as shown in Figure 5-10.

Figure 5-10 Binding SHDSL Ports to the SHDSL Line Profile for the G.SHDSL Service in the

ATM Transparent Mode

6. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,

as shown in Figure 5-11.

Figure 5-11 Binding SHDSL Ports to the SHDSL Line Profile for the G.SHDSL Service in the

ATM Transparent Mode (Completed)

Version: B/1 5-17

Page 244: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

5.1.115.1.11 Configuring the PVC Profile

Configure PVC basic parameters such as PVC index, virtual path identifier and

virtual channel identifier value for identifying each PVC.

The HD32A card provides 32 G.SHDSL user ports; and one G.SHDSL port

corresponds to eight PVCs. A PVC can be configured with up to 16 subscriber

services, and a G.SHDSL port can also be configured with up to 16 subscriber

services.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE

manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to

bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common ConfigíProfile ConfigíPVC

Profile to open the PVC Profile tab.

4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,

as shown in Figure 5-12.

Figure 5-12 Configuring the PVC Profile for the G.SHDSL Service in the ATM Transparent

Mode

5.1.125.1.12 Binding SHDSL Ports to the PVC Profile

Bind designated ports to the set PVC profile, and the ports will control the data

stream according to the transmission rules defined in the profile.

5-18 Version: B/1

Page 245: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

5 Configuring the G.SHDSL Service

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE

manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to

bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common ConfigíPort ConfigíPort

Binding PVC Profile. Select the HD32A card to be configured in the Select

Object window that appears, and then click OK to open the Port Binding PVC

Profile tab.

4. Click the Batch Modify button on the toolbar, and select the line Profile ID in

the Modify in a batch manner dialog box that appears.

5. Select DEFPVC.PRF from the Initial drop-down list, and use the default values

for other parameters. Then click OK, as shown in Figure 5-13.

Figure 5-13 Binding SHDSL Ports to the PVC Profile for the G. SHDSL Service in the ATM

Transparent Transmission Mode

6. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,

as shown in Figure 5-14.

Version: B/1 5-19

Page 246: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

Figure 5-14 Binding SHDSL Ports to the PVC Profile for the G. SHDSL Service in the ATM

Transparent Transmission Mode (Completed)

5.1.135.1.13 Configuring the Port Rate Limiting Profile

Configure the port rate limiting profile and set the parameters including uplink /

downlink Policing status and uplink / downlink port assured rate.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE

manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to

bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common ConfigíProfile ConfigíPort

Rate Profile to bring up the Port Rate Profile tab.

4. Click the Add button on the toolbar, and enter 1 in the Enter the number of

rows to add dialog box that appears. Click OK to create a new port rate limiting

profile.

5. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

6. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,

as shown in Figure 5-15.

5-20 Version: B/1

Page 247: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

5 Configuring the G.SHDSL Service

Figure 5-15 Configuring the Port Rate Limiting Profile for the G.SHDSL Service in the ATM

Transparent Transmission Mode

5.1.145.1.14 Binding SHDSL Ports to the Rate Limiting Profile

Bind designated ports to the set rate limiting profile, and the ports will control the

data stream according to the uplink rate defined in the profile.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE

manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to

bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common ConfigíPort ConfigíPort

Binding Rate Profile. Select the HD32A card to be configured in the Select

Object window that appears, and then click OK to open the Port Binding Rate

Profile tab.

4. Click the Batch Modify button on the toolbar, and select the line Profile ID in

the Modify in a batch manner dialog box that appears.

5. Select PORTRATE.PRF0 from the Initial drop-down list, and use the default

values for other parameters. Then click OK, as shown in Figure 5-16.

Version: B/1 5-21

Page 248: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

Figure 5-16 Binding SHDSL Ports to the Rate Limiting Profile for the G. SHDSL Service in the

ATM Transparent Transmission Mode

6. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,

as shown in Figure 5-17.

Figure 5-17 Binding SHDSL Ports to the Rate Limiting Profile for the G.SHDSL Service in the

ATM Transparent Transmission Mode (Completed)

5-22 Version: B/1

Page 249: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

5 Configuring the G.SHDSL Service

5.1.155.1.15 Configuring Parameters of the SHDSL Port BoundGroup

Configure the SHDSL port bound group to enhance the line rate.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE

manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to

bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Data ServiceíSHDSL M-Pair to open

the SHDSL M-Pair tab.

4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,

as shown in Figure 5-18.

Figure 5-18 Configuring the SHDSL Port Bound Group Parameters for the G.SHDSL Service

in the ATM Transparent Transmission Mode

5.1.165.1.16 Configuring the Port Service VLAN

Configure the service VLAN for the designated port on the HD32A card based on

unicast service flow.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE

manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to

bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Data ServiceíPort VLAN Config to

open the Port VLAN Config tab.

Version: B/1 5-23

Page 250: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

4. Click HD32A in the left pane, and click PVC Index in the upper-right pane.

Then select the 32 ports with the PVC Index 0, as shown in Figure 5-19.

Figure 5-19 Selecting the Ports with PVC Index 0 for the G.SHDSL Service in the ATM

Transparent Transmission Mode

5. Click the Add button, and in the Please Select Port & PVC dialog box that

appears, click the >> button to add all the ports to the Selected pane, as shown

in Figure 5-20.

5-24 Version: B/1

Page 251: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

5 Configuring the G.SHDSL Service

Figure 5-20 Selecting the Ports and the PVC to be Added with Data

6. Click OK, and enter 1 in the Enter the number of rows to add dialog box that

appears. Then click OK and return to the Port VLAN Config window.

7. Click the first row in the lower right pane, and then click the Batch Modify

button.

8. In the Batch Modify dialog box that appears, select the Service Type check

box and select Unicast from the Initial Value drop-down list. Retain the default

values for other parameters.

9. Select the CVLAN Mode row, and select 0 from the Initial Value drop-down list.

Use the default values for other parameters.

10. Select the CVLAN Settings row. In the Configuration Item group box, select

the VLAN ID row, and enter 800 in the Initial Value field. Enter 1 in the Step

text box. Use the default values for other parameters.

Version: B/1 5-25

Page 252: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

Note:

When the VLAN ID values increase or decrease regularly, set the Step to

the difference between two successive values. The item Redo refers to

the count of repeated values prior to calculation of the increment.

11. Select the line Priority or COS, and select 0 from the Initial Value drop-down

list. Use the default values for other parameters.

12. Select the line TPID, and enter 33024 in the Initial Value field. Use default

values for other parameters, as shown in Figure 5-21.

Figure 5-21 Modifying the CVLAN Settings in a Batch Manner for the G.SHDSL Service in the

ATM Transparent Transmission Mode

13. Configure other parameters according to the planning data.

5-26 Version: B/1

Page 253: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

5 Configuring the G.SHDSL Service

14. Return to the Port VLAN Config window, and click the Create on Device

button on the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown in Figure 5-22.

Figure 5-22 The Port Service VLAN Configuration Completed for the G.SHDSL Service in the

ATM Transparent Mode

5.1.175.1.17 Configuration Result

PC1 to PC31 can access Internet after the configuration is completed.

5.25.2 Example of Configuring the G.SHDSL ServiceBased on TDM (Local Mode)

The following introduces how to configure the G.SHDSL service in the transparent

transmission mode (local mode based on TDM).

5.2.15.2.1 Configuration Rules

G.SHDSL supports multiple service types, such as ATM, TDM, etc.

Version: B/1 5-27

Page 254: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

TDM means the time division multiplexing mode. TDM refers to transmitting multiple

digital data, voice, and video signals at one medium at the same time via different

channels or timeslots. It needs clock synchronization, mainly used in PSTN.

5.2.25.2.2 Network Diagram

Service configuration

Access two G.SHDSL services via the HDT8A card of the AN5006-20.

Network Diagram

Figure 5-23 Network Diagram of the G.SHDSL Service in the TDM Transparent Mode

The PBX and E1 / V.35 data private line services are accessed to the HDT8A card

of the AN5006-20 via the Modem, and the user data are transparently transmitted to

the PSTN in the uplink direction via the E1 link of the HDT8A card. In the downlink

direction, the reverse process takes place.

Hardware Configuration

The equipment uses the HDT8A and HDT8B cards to access the G.SHDSL

services. In this example, an HDT8A card is used.

5-28 Version: B/1

Page 255: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

5 Configuring the G.SHDSL Service

5.2.35.2.3 Planning Data

The HDT8A card in Slot 1 of the AN5006-20 acts as the service interface card; the

management control card, the PWRB card, and the FANB card are required. The

planning data are shown in Table 5-2.

Table 5-2 Planning Data for the G.SHDSL Service in the TDM Transparent Mode

Item Description Example

Configuring the

working mode

of the card

(optional)

Slot No.The slot number of the HDT8B card

that is actually used.Optional. Users need

to configure this item

when the HDT8B card

serves as the service

interface card.

1

Working Mode

Set the working mode of the HDT8B

card. The options include local

mode and remote mode.

Local

Configuring E1

data

Slot No. The slot number of the HDT8A card in actual use. 1

Port No. The E1 port number of the HDT8A card actually used. E1-1

Impedance

Configure this item according to the network planning of the

operator. Select the E1 interface impedance that is actually

used. The options include 75© and 120©.

75©

Configuring

clock

Slot No. The slot number of the HDT8A card actually used. 1

Main Clock Sets the clock acquirement mode.E1

1-LoopTimed

Enabling the

SHDSL port

Slot No. The slot number of the HDT8A card actually used. 1

Port No. The SHDSL port number of the HDT8A card actually used. 1 to 8

EnableEnables or disables the SHDSL port. The default setting is

Disable.Enable

Configuring an

SHDSL line

profile

Profile NameConfigure this item according to the network planning of the

operator.ShdslTDM

Port ModeConfigure this item according to the network planning of the

operator. The options include ATM and TDM.TDM

Code TypeConfigure this item according to the network planning of the

operator. The options include PAM16, PAM32, and Auto.PAM32

Transmission

standard

Configure this item according to the network planning of the

operator. The options include Annex A and Annex B.Annex B

Target SNR

Margin Down

(dB)

The value range is -10 to 21; the unit is dB; and the default

value is 6 dB.6

Insure SNR

Margin Down

(DB)

The value ranges from -10 to 21; the unit is dB; and the default

value is 3dB.3

Version: B/1 5-29

Page 256: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

Table 5-2 Planning Data for the G.SHDSL Service in the TDM Transparent Mode (Continued)

Item Description Example

Target SNRM Up

(DB)

The value range is -10 to 21; the unit is dB; and the default

value is 6 dB.6

Target SNR

Margin Up (DB)

The value ranges from -10 to 21; the unit is dB; and the default

value is 3dB.3

Line Probe

Enable

Enables or disables the line detection function. The default

setting is disable.Disable

Binding SHDSL

ports to the

SHDSL line

profile

Slot No. The slot number of the HDT8A card actually used. 1

Port No. The SHDSL port number of the HDT8A card actually used. 1 to 8

Profile Id Select the configured SHDSL line profile. ShdslTDM

5.2.45.2.4 Configuration Flow

The flow of configuring the G.SHDSL service in the TDM transparent transmission

mode is shown in Figure 5-24.

5-30 Version: B/1

Page 257: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

5 Configuring the G.SHDSL Service

Figure 5-24 Flow Chart for Configuring the G.SHDSL Service in the TDM Transparent

Transmission Mode

5.2.55.2.5 Configuring E1 Data

Configure the impedance value of the E1 link.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE

manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to

bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select POTS ServiceíV5 Voice Service

ConfigíE1 Configuration. In the Select Object window that appears, select

Version: B/1 5-31

Page 258: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

the HDT8A card to be configured, and click OK to bring up the E1

Configuration tab.

4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,

as shown in Figure 5-25.

Figure 5-25 Configuring E1 Data for the G.SHDSL Service in the TDM Transparent

Transmission Mode

5.2.65.2.6 Configuring Clock

Configure the mode of acquiring the E1 link clock.

Precautions

u The equipment supports clock acquired from multiple ways, including the local

oscillator clock and the clock extracted from E1 links 1 to 8.

u If the clock of the designated E1 link is unavailable, the equipment will search

for the available E1 link automatically according to the sequence of the E1 links.

For example, users want to extract clock from the first E1 link, but this E1 link is

unavailable. In this case, the equipment will try to extract the clock in sequence

starting from the second E1 link until the clock is extracted successfully.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE

manager.

5-32 Version: B/1

Page 259: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

5 Configuring the G.SHDSL Service

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to

bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select POTS ServiceíV5 Voice Service

ConfigíClock Configuration. In the Select Object window that appears,

select the HDT8A card to be configured, and click OK to bring up the Clock

Configuration tab.

4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,

as shown in Figure 5-26.

Figure 5-26 Configuring Clock for the G.SHDSL Service in the TDM Transparent Transmission

Mode

5.2.75.2.7 Enabling the SHDSL Port

Enable the SHDSL port. When disabled, the ports will be unable to receive or

transmit data.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE

manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to

bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common ConfigíPort ConfigíPort

Enable. Select the HDT8A card to be configured in the Select Object window

that appears, and then click OK to open the Port Enable tab.

4. Click the Batch Modify button, and select the line Enable in the Modify in a

batch manner dialog box.

5. Select Enable from the Initial drop-down list, enter 0 in the Step field, and click

OK, as shown in Figure 5-27.

Version: B/1 5-33

Page 260: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

Figure 5-27 Enabling the SHDSL Port for the G.SHDSL Service in the TDM Transparent

Transmission Mode

6. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,

as shown in Figure 5-28.

Figure 5-28 Enabling the SHDSL Port for the G.SHDSL Service in the TDM Transparent

Transmission Mode (Completed)

5-34 Version: B/1

Page 261: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

5 Configuring the G.SHDSL Service

5.2.85.2.8 Configuring an SHDSL Line Profile

Configure basic parameters of the SHDSL line profile, such as port mode, line

encoding type and line transmission mode.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE

manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to

bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common ConfigProfile ConfigSHDSL

Line Profile to open the SHDSL Line Profile tab.

4. Click the Add button on the toolbar, and enter 1 in the Enter the number of

rows to add dialog box that appears. Click OK to create a new SHDSL line

profile.

5. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

6. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,

as shown in Figure 5-29.

Figure 5-29 Configuring the SHDSL Line Profile for the G.SHDSL Service in the TDM

Transparent Transmission Mode

5.2.95.2.9 Binding SHDSL Ports to the SHDSL Line Profile

Bind designated ports to the set SHDSL line profile, and the ports will control data

stream according to the transmission rules and the rate limit defined in the profile.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE

manager.

Version: B/1 5-35

Page 262: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to

bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common ConfigíSHDSL Port Binding

Line Profile. Select the HD32A card to be configured in the Select Object

window that appears, and then click OK to open the SHDSL Port Binding Line

Profile tab.

4. Click the Batch Modify button on the toolbar, and select the line Profile ID in

the Modify in a batch manner dialog box that appears.

5. Select ShdslTDM from the Initial drop-down list, and use the default values for

other parameters. Then click OK, as shown in Figure 5-30.

Figure 5-30 Binding SHDSL Ports to the SHDSL Line Profile for the G.SHDSL Service in the

TDM Transparent Transmission Mode (Completed)

6. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,

as shown in Figure 5-31.

5-36 Version: B/1

Page 263: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

5 Configuring the G.SHDSL Service

Figure 5-31 Binding SHDSL Ports to the SHDSL Line Profile for the G.SHDSL Service in the

TDM Transparent Transmission Mode (Completed)

5.2.105.2.10 Configuration Result

The POTS service and data service can access the PSTN successfully.

Version: B/1 5-37

Page 264: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device
Page 265: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

66 Configuring the Multicast Service

The following introduces how to start up the multicast services for the AN5006-20.

Example for Multicast Service Configuration of the ADSL Card in the Proxy

Mode

Example of Configuring the Multicast Service on the VDSL Card in the

Controllable Mode

Version: B/1 6-1

Page 266: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

6.16.1 Example for Multicast Service Configurationof the ADSL Card in the Proxy Mode

The following introduces how to configure the multicast service in the proxy mode.

6.1.16.1.1 Configuration Rules

u The AN5006-20 supports multicast protocol message processing, including

joining, leaving and querying.

u The AN5006-20 supports adding or translating VLANs of the user protocol

message.

u When the multicast mode is set to proxy, the AD64 card will work in the

snooping mode, whereas the management control card, as the proxy of the

user interface card, will manage the members of the multicast group actively, so

as to reduce protocol overhead of the uplink device.

u Each AD64 card can provide up to 64 ADSL user interfaces. Each subscriber

can view up to 256 multicast programs and each AD64 card can support as

many as 1023 multicast programs.

6.1.26.1.2 Network Diagram

Service Planning

Use the AD64 card of the AN5006-20 to access 64 proxy multicast services.

6-2 Version: B/1

Page 267: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

6 Configuring the Multicast Service

Network Diagram

Figure 6-1 Multicast Service Network in the Proxy Mode

In the uplink direction, the AN5006-20 transparently transmits the VLAN ID on the

terminal side to the IPTV Server. In the downlink direction, the AN5006-20

transparently transmits the VLAN IDs of the downlink data packets. Then the home

gateway strips the VLAN IDs, and forwards the data to video subscribers.

Hardware Configuration

The equipment can access multicast services in the proxy mode using the AD32,

AD64, CASA or VD32 card. In this example, an AD64 card is used.

6.1.36.1.3 Planning Data

Table 6-1 Planning Data of Multicast Service in the Proxy Mode

Item Description Example

Disabling the

Uplink Port

Multicast Packet

Suppression

Slot No.The slot number of the management control card,

being 5 fixedly.5

Port No.Configure according to the number of the actually

used uplink port.1

Packet Type Select Multicast, corresponding to multicast service. Multicast

Enable/disable Disables the multicast packet suppression function. Disable

Version: B/1 6-3

Page 268: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

Table 6-1 Planning Data of Multicast Service in the Proxy Mode (Continued)

Item Description Example

Configuring

Uplink Service

VLAN

Service ID Automatically assigned by the system 1

Service NameConfigure this item according to the operator’s

network planning.iptv1

Starting VLAN IDConfigure this item according to the operator’s

network planning.200

VLAN ID EndConfigure this item according to the operator’s

network planning.200

Port No.Configure according to the number of the actually

used uplink port.GE1

Port Tag/Untag

Set the VLAN tag property of the uplink service to

untag or tag.

u In the UNTAG mode, the tags of the uplink

packets will be stripped automatically when they

pass the port and the packets will be uplinked in

the untag form, while the downlink untag packets

will be added with designated tags when they

pass the port.

u In the TAG mode, the tags of the uplink / downlink

data packets will not be processed when they

pass the port.

tag

Configuring

Multicast ModeIGMP Mode

Configure this item according to the operator’s

network planning.Proxy Mode

Configuring

IGMP Proxy IPIGMP Proxy IP

Configure this item according to the operator’s

network planning.10.25.10.1

Configuring

Multicast Default

VLAN

Default SVLAN ID

Configure according to the network planning of the

operator. The default multicast SVLAN ID should be in

the range of the uplink SVLAN.

200

Default CVLAN IDConfigure according to the network planning of the

operator. Retain the default value.-

Configuring a

Port Service

VLAN

Slot No.The number of the slot actually used by the AD64

card.2

Port No.The number of the port actually used by the AD64

card.1 to 64

Service Type The actual service type Multicast

6-4 Version: B/1

Page 269: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

6 Configuring the Multicast Service

Table 6-1 Planning Data of Multicast Service in the Proxy Mode (Continued)

Item Description Example

CVLAN Mode

Configure the VLAN tag processing mode of the ADSL

port according to the network planning of the operator.

u TAG: Configures a VLAN tagging to the received

data.

u Translation: Translates the original VLAN ID to

one compliant with the operator's rules.

u Transparent: Transmits the received data directly.

Transparent

CVLAN IDConfigure the received VLAN ID according to the

network planning of the operator.200

Enabling the

ADSL Port

Slot No.The number of the slot actually used by the AD64

card.2

Port No.The number of the port actually used by the AD64

card.1 to 64

ENABLEFLAG Enables the ADSL port. Enable

Version: B/1 6-5

Page 270: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

6.1.46.1.4 Configuration Flow

Figure 6-2 Configuration Flow in the Proxy Mode

6.1.56.1.5 Disabling the Uplink Port Multicast PacketSuppression

Disable the multicast packet suppression function of the equipment's uplink port, so

as to avoid rate restriction on the multicast messages.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE

manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to

bring up the Local Service Config tab.

6-6 Version: B/1

Page 271: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

6 Configuring the Multicast Service

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Data ServiceíBroadcast Strom

Suppression to bring up the Broadcast Strom Suppression tab.

4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

5. Click Create on Device on the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown

in Figure 6-3.

Figure 6-3 Disabling the Uplink Port Multicast Packet Suppression

6.1.66.1.6 Configuring the Uplink Service VLAN

Process the tag of the uplink VLAN via the uplink port. The user services within the

VLAN ID range are transmitted to the upper level network via this uplink port

according to the VLAN tag properties, and vice versa.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE

manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to

bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Data ServiceíMCU Port Service VLAN

to open the MCU Port Service VLAN tab.

4. Click the Add button on the toolbar. In the Enter the number of rows to add

dialog box that appears, type 1 and click OK to add a service VLAN entry.

5. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

6. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,

as shown in Figure 6-4.

Figure 6-4 Configuring the Uplink Service VLAN

Version: B/1 6-7

Page 272: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

6.1.76.1.7 Configuring the Multicast Mode

Configure the equipment's working mode to implement the multicast service.

Precautions

u When the multicast mode is set to proxy, the AD64 card will work in the

snooping mode, whereas the service management card, as the proxy of the

user interface card, will manage the members of the multicast group actively, so

as to reduce protocol overhead of the uplink device.

u When the multicast mode is set to snooping, both the AD64 card and the

service management card work in the snooping mode. As the configuration

procedures in this mode are similar to those of the proxy mode, only different in

the multicast mode setting; configuration examples for the snooping mode are

omitted here.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE

manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to

bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Multicast ServiceíIGMP Param.

ConfigíIGMP Mode to access the IGMP Mode tab.

4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data concerned.

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,

as shown in Figure 6-5.

Figure 6-5 Configuring the OLT Multicast Mode

6-8 Version: B/1

Page 273: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

6 Configuring the Multicast Service

6.1.86.1.8 Configuring the Multicast Proxy IPAddress

Configure the multicast proxy IP address of the equipment. This IP address will be

used as the source IP address of the multicast protocol message transmitted by the

equipment.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE

manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to

bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Multicast ServiceíIGMP Proxy IP to

open the IGMP Proxy IP tab.

4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

5. Click Create on Device on the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown

in Figure 6-6.

Figure 6-6 Configuring the Multicast Proxy IP Address in the Proxy Mode

6.1.96.1.9 Configuring Multicast Default VLAN

Configure the multicast VLAN information and designate a VLAN path for the

multicast service.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE

manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to

bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Multicast ServiceíMulticast VLANí

Multicast VLAN to bring up the Multicast VLAN tab.

Version: B/1 6-9

Page 274: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data concerned.

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,

as shown in Figure 6-7.

Figure 6-7 Configuring Multicast Default VLAN

6.1.106.1.10 Configuring the Port Service VLAN

Configure the service VLAN of the designated port on the AD64 card.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE

manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to

bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Data ServiceíPort VLAN Config to

open the Port VLAN Config tab.

4. Click AD64 in the left pane, and click PVC Index in the upper-right pane. Then

select ports 0 to 64 with the PVC Index 0, as shown in Figure 6-8.

6-10 Version: B/1

Page 275: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

6 Configuring the Multicast Service

Figure 6-8 Selecting the Ports with PVC Index 0 in the Proxy Mode

5. Click the Add button, and in the Please Select Port & PVC dialog box that

appears, click the >> button to add all the ports with the PVC Index 0 to the

Selected pane, as shown in Figure 6-9.

Version: B/1 6-11

Page 276: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

Figure 6-9 Selecting the Ports and the PVC to be Added with Data

6. Click OK, and enter 1 in the Enter the number of rows to add dialog box that

appears. Then click OK and return to the Port VLAN Config window.

7. Click the first row in the lower right pane, and then click the Batch Modify

button.

8. In the Batch Modify dialog box that appears, select CVLAN Settings.

9. In the Configuration Item group box, select the line VLAN ID, and enter 200 in

the Initial Value field. User the default values for other parameters.

Note:

When the VLAN ID values increase or decrease regularly, set the Step to

the difference between two successive values. The item Redo refers to

the count of repeated values prior to calculation of the increment.

10. Select the line Priority or COS, and select 0 from the Initial Value drop-down

list. Use the default values for other parameters.

6-12 Version: B/1

Page 277: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

6 Configuring the Multicast Service

11. Select the line TPID, and enter 33024 in the Initial Value field. Use default

values for other parameters, as shown in Figure 6-10.

Figure 6-10 Modifying the CVLAN Settings in a Batch Manner in the Proxy Mode

12. Configure other parameters according to the planning data.

13. Return to the Port VLAN Config window, and click the Create on Device

button on the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown in Figure 6-11.

Version: B/1 6-13

Page 278: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

Figure 6-11 The Port Service VLAN Configuration Completed in the Proxy Mode

6.1.116.1.11 Enabling the ADSL Port

Enable the ports of the AD64 card. Users can not configure the parameters for the

ports when they are disabled.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE

manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to

bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common ConfigíPort ConfigíPort

Enable. Select the AD64 card to be configured in the Select Object window

that appears, and then click OK to open the Port Enable tab.

4. Click the Batch Modify button, and select the Enable check box in the Modify

in a batch manner dialog box.

6-14 Version: B/1

Page 279: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

6 Configuring the Multicast Service

5. Select Enable from the Initial drop-down list, and click OK, as shown in

Figure 6-12.

Figure 6-12 Modifying ADSL Port Enable Flag in a Batch Manner

6. Return to the Port Enable window, and you will find that the item Enable for all

the ports has been modified to Enable.

7. Click Create on Device on the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown

in Figure 6-13.

Figure 6-13 Configuration for Enabling the ADSL Port Completed

Version: B/1 6-15

Page 280: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

6.1.126.1.12 Configuration Result

After completing the configuration of multicast services in the proxy mode, check the

equipment status as follows.

6.1.12.16.1.12.1 Viewing Online Multicast Group Information

View the online multicast group information in the current multicast mode.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE

manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to

bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. Select Get InformationíIGMP Param. InformationíMC Group Statistics in

the Operational Tree pane.

4. Click the Read from Device button on the toolbar to read the current online

multicast group information. See Figure 6-14.

Figure 6-14 Viewing Online Multicast Group Information

6.1.12.26.1.12.2 Viewing Online Group Information of Appointed Port

View the online multicast group information at Port 1 of the AD64 card in Slot 1

under the current multicast mode.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE

manager.

6-16 Version: B/1

Page 281: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

6 Configuring the Multicast Service

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to

bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. Select Get InformationíIGMP Param. InformationíOnline IGMP Group

Information For Specific Port in the Operational Tree pane.

4. In the left pane, double-click the Slot No. field and enter 2. Then double-click

the Port No. field, and enter 1.

5. Click Read from Device in the toolbar to read the online multicast group

information for the specified port. See Figure 6-15.

Figure 6-15 Viewing Online Group Information of a Specified Port in the Proxy Mode

6.1.12.36.1.12.3 Viewing the Core Switch Card's Multicast Address Table

View the multicast address table of the management control card in the current

multicast mode.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE

manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to

bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Get InformationíIGMP Param.

InformationíMCU MC Address Table.

4. Click Read from Device in the toolbar to read the multicast address table of

the core switch card. See Figure 6-16.

Version: B/1 6-17

Page 282: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

Figure 6-16 Checking the Core Switch Card’s Multicast Address Table in the Proxy Mode

6.1.12.46.1.12.4 Viewing the Multicast Address Table of the Line Card

View the multicast address table of the AD64 card in Slot 2 in the current multicast

mode.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE

manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to

bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Get InformationíIGMP Param.

InformationíLine Card MC Address Table.

4. In the left pane, double-click the Slot No. field and enter 2.

5. Click Read from Device in the toolbar to read the line card's multicast address

table. See Figure 6-17.

Figure 6-17 Checking the Line Card’s Multicast Address Table in the Proxy Mode

6-18 Version: B/1

Page 283: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

6 Configuring the Multicast Service

6.26.2 Example of Configuring the Multicast Serviceon the VDSL Card in the Controllable Mode

The following introduces how to configure the multicast service in the controllable

mode.

6.2.16.2.1 Configuration Rules

u Under the controllable mode, the VD32 card works in the controllable mode,

whereas the management control card, as the proxy of the user interface card,

manages subscribers' authorities to view or preview the programs.

u Each VD32 card can provide up to 32 ADSL user interfaces. Each subscriber

can view up to 256 multicast programs and each VD32 card can support as

many as 1023 multicast programs.

u The AN5006-20 supports multicast protocol message processing, including

joining, leaving and querying.

u The AN5006-20 supports adding or translating VLANs of the user protocol

message.

6.2.26.2.2 Network Diagram

Service Planning

Use the VD32 card of the AN5006-20 to access two controllable multicast services.

Version: B/1 6-19

Page 284: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

Network Diagram

Figure 6-18 Network Diagram for Multicast Service in the Controlled Mode

In the uplink direction, the AN5006-20 transparently transmits the VLAN ID on the

terminal side to the IPTV Server. In the downlink direction, the AN5006-20

transparently transmits the VLAN IDs of the downlink data packets. Then the home

gateway strips the VLAN IDs, and forwards the data to video subscribers.

Hardware Configuration

The equipment can access multicast services in the controllable mode using the

AD32, AD64, CASA or VD32 card. In this example, a VD32 card is used.

6.2.36.2.3 Planning Data

Table 6-2 Planning Data of Multicast Service in the Controlled Mode

Item Description Example

Disabling the

Uplink Port

Multicast

Packet

Suppression

Slot No.

The slot number of the

management control card, being 5

fixedly.

5

Port No.Configure according to the number

of the actually used uplink port.1

Packet TypeSelect Multicast, corresponding to

multicast service.Multicast

6-20 Version: B/1

Page 285: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

6 Configuring the Multicast Service

Table 6-2 Planning Data of Multicast Service in the Controlled Mode (Continued)

Item Description Example

Enable/disableDisables the multicast packet

suppression function.Disable

Configuring

Uplink Service

VLAN

Service IDAutomatically assigned by the

system1

Service NameConfigure this item according to

the operator’s network planning.iptv2

Starting VLAN IDConfigure this item according to

the operator’s network planning.100

VLAN ID EndConfigure this item according to

the operator’s network planning.200

Port No.Configure according to the number

of the actually used uplink port.GE1

Port Tag/Untag

Set the VLAN tag property of the

uplink service to untag or tag.

u In the UNTAG mode, the tags

of the uplink packets will be

stripped automatically when

they pass the port and the

packets will be uplinked in the

untag form, while the downlink

untag packets will be added

with designated tags when

they pass the port.

u In the TAG mode, the tags of

the uplink / downlink data

packets will not be processed

when they pass the port.

tag

Configuring

Multicast ModeIGMP Mode

Configure this item according to

the operator’s network planning.Controlled mode

Configuring

IGMP Proxy IPIGMP Proxy IP

Configure this item according to

the operator’s network planning.10.26.10.1

Configuring

Multicast

Default VLAN

Default SVLAN

ID

Configure according to the network

planning of the operator. The

default multicast SVLAN ID should

be in the range of the uplink

SVLAN.

100

Default CVLAN

ID

Configure according to the network

planning of the operator. Retain

the default value.

-

Version: B/1 6-21

Page 286: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

Table 6-2 Planning Data of Multicast Service in the Controlled Mode (Continued)

Item Description Example

Configuring

Multicast

Profile

Profile IDAutomatically assigned by the

system.1

Profile NameConfigure this item according to

the operator’s network planning.a

Group AddressConfigure this item according to

the operator’s network planning.226.0.1.1 226.0.1.2 226.0.1.3

AuthorityConfigure according to the network

planning of the operator.Normal Normal Preview

Configure

multicast

group

parameters

Group AddressThe group address configured in

the multicast profile226.0.1.1 226.0.1.2 226.0.1.3

Group SVLAN

Configure according to the network

planning of the operator. The

group SVLAN should be in the

range of the uplink SVLAN.

100 200 100

Group CVLAN

Configure according to the network

planning of the operator. Retain

the default value.

- - -

Preview Count

(Times)

Configure according to the network

planning of the operator.- - 5

Preview TimeConfigure according to the network

planning of the operator.- - 10

Preview IntervalConfigure according to the network

planning of the operator.- - 20

Preview ResetConfigure according to the network

planning of the operator.- - 24

Preview Total

Time

Configure according to the network

planning of the operator.- - 50

Configure

multicast port

parameters

Slot No.The number of the slot actually

used by the VD32 card.3

Port No.The number of the port actually

used by the VD32 card.1 2

Control switch

Configure according to the network

planning of the operator. Select

controlled mode.

Controllable

Multicast ModeThe profile name configured in the

multicast profilea

6-22 Version: B/1

Page 287: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

6 Configuring the Multicast Service

Table 6-2 Planning Data of Multicast Service in the Controlled Mode (Continued)

Item Description Example

Max Online

Groups (Group)

Configure according to the network

planning of the operator. Retain

the default value.

32

Port Bandwidth

(Kbit/b)

Configure according to the network

planning of the operator. Retain

the default value.

0

Fast leaveConfigure according to the network

planning of the operator.NON FAST LEAVE

Configuring a

Port Service

VLAN

Slot No.The number of the slot actually

used by the VD32 card.3

Port No.The number of the port actually

used by the VD32 card.1 2

Service Type The actual service type Multicast

CVLAN Mode

Configure the VLAN tag

processing mode of the ADSL port

according to the network planning

of the operator.

u TAG: Configures a VLAN

tagging to the received data.

u Translation: Translates the

original VLAN ID to one

compliant with the operator's

rules.

u Transparent: Transmits the

received data directly.

Transparent

CVLAN ID

Configure the received VLAN ID

according to the network planning

of the operator.

100, 200

Enabling the

VDSL Port

Slot No.The number of the slot actually

used by the VD32 card.3

Port No.The number of the port actually

used by the VD32 card.1 2

ENABLEFLAG Port Enable Enable

Version: B/1 6-23

Page 288: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

6.2.46.2.4 Configuration Flow

Figure 6-19 Configuration Flow in the Controlled Mode

6.2.56.2.5 Disabling the Uplink Port Multicast PacketSuppression

Disable the multicast packet suppression function of the uplink port.

6-24 Version: B/1

Page 289: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

6 Configuring the Multicast Service

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE

manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to

bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Data ServiceíBroadcast Strom

Suppression to bring up the Broadcast Strom Suppression tab.

4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,

as shown in Figure 6-20.

Figure 6-20 Disabling the Uplink Port Multicast Packet Suppression

6.2.66.2.6 Configuring the Uplink Service VLAN

Process the tag of the uplink VLAN via the uplink port. The user services within the

VLAN ID range are transmitted to the upper level network via this uplink port

according to the VLAN tag properties, and vice versa.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE

manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to

bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Data ServiceíMCU Port Service VLAN

to open the MCU Port Service VLAN tab.

4. Click the Add button on the toolbar. In the Enter the number of rows to add

dialog box that appears, type 1 and click OK to add a service VLAN entry.

5. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

Version: B/1 6-25

Page 290: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

6. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,

as shown in Figure 6-21.

Figure 6-21 Configuring the Uplink Service VLAN

6.2.76.2.7 Configuring the Multicast Mode

Configure the equipment's working mode to implement the multicast service.

Note:

Under the controllable mode, the VD32 card works in the controllable

mode, whereas the management control card, as the proxy of the user

interface card, manages subscribers' authorities to view or preview the

programs.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE

manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to

bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Multicast ServiceíIGMP Param.

ConfigíIGMP Mode to access the IGMP Mode tab.

4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data concerned.

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,

as shown in Figure 6-22.

Figure 6-22 Configuring the Controllable Multicast Mode

6-26 Version: B/1

Page 291: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

6 Configuring the Multicast Service

6.2.86.2.8 Configuring the Multicast Proxy IPAddress

Configure the multicast proxy IP address of the equipment. This IP address will be

used as the source IP address of the multicast protocol message transmitted by the

equipment.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE

manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to

bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Multicast ServiceíIGMP Proxy IP to

open the IGMP Proxy IP tab.

4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,

as shown in Figure 6-23.

Figure 6-23 Configuring the Multicast Proxy IPAddress in the Controllable Mode

6.2.96.2.9 Configuring the Default Multicast VLAN

Configure the multicast VLAN information and designate a VLAN path for the

multicast service.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE

manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to

bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Multicast ServiceíMulticast VLANí

Multicast VLAN to bring up the Multicast VLAN tab.

Version: B/1 6-27

Page 292: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data concerned.

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,

as shown in Figure 6-24.

Figure 6-24 Configuring Default Multicast VLAN in the Controllable Mode

6.2.106.2.10 Configuring the Multicast Profile

Configure the authority of watching programs for a specified multicast group.

Note:

The first row is the blank by default and can not be modified. When

configuring the IGMP Port Parameters, if the user port is not required to

be bound with the multicast profile, the empty profile should be selected.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE

manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to

bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Multicast ServiceíMulticast Profile &

PortíMulticast Profile.

4. In the left pane, click Add on the toolbar, and enter 1 in the Enter the number

of rows to add dialog box that appears. Click OK to create a new multicast

profile.

5. In the right pane, click Add on the toolbar, and enter 3 in the Enter the number

of rows to add dialog box that appears. Click OK to add three entries.

6. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

7. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,

as shown in Figure 6-25.

6-28 Version: B/1

Page 293: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

6 Configuring the Multicast Service

Figure 6-25 Configuring the Multicast Profile

6.2.116.2.11 Configuring Multicast Group Parameters

Configure basic parameters of the multicast group, including group SVLAN, preview

count, preview duration, and preview interval, etc.

Note:

Retain the default preview values of the multicast groups 226.0.1.1 and

226.0.1.2. Only when the multicast groups are in the preview mode can

the preview parameters become valid.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE

manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to

bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Multicast ServiceíIGMP Param.

ConfigíIGMP Group Parameters to access the IGMP Group Parameters

tab.

4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,

as shown in Figure 6-26.

Version: B/1 6-29

Page 294: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

Figure 6-26 Configuring Multicast Group Parameters

6.2.126.2.12 Configuring Multicast Port Parameters

Configure the multicast port parameters, including control switch, multicast group

profile, maximum number of online groups, port bandwidth, etc.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE

manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to

bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Multicast ServiceíIGMP Param.

ConfigíIGMP Port Parameters to access the IGMP Port Parameters tab.

4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,

as shown in Figure 6-27.

Figure 6-27 Configuring Multicast Port Parameters

6-30 Version: B/1

Page 295: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

6 Configuring the Multicast Service

6.2.136.2.13 Configuring the Port Service VLAN

Configure the service VLAN of the designated port on the VD32 card of the

equipment.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE

manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to

bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Data ServiceíPort VLAN Config to

open the Port VLAN Config tab.

4. Click VD32 in the left pane, and click PVC Index in the upper-right pane. Then

select ports 1 and 2 at the same time, as shown in Figure 6-28.

Figure 6-28 Selecting Ports in the Controllable Mode

5. Click the Add button, and in the Please Select Port & PVC dialog box that

appears, click the >> button to add all the ports to the Selected pane, as shown

in Figure 6-29.

Version: B/1 6-31

Page 296: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

Figure 6-29 Selecting the Ports and the PVC to be Added with Data

6. Click OK, and enter 1 in the Enter the number of rows to add dialog box that

appears. Then click OK and return to the Port VLAN Config window.

7. Click the first row in the lower right pane, and then click the Batch Modify

button.

8. In the Batch Modify dialog box that appears, select CVLAN Settings.

9. In the Configuration Item group box, select the line VLAN ID, entering 100 in

the Initial Value field and 1 in the step field.

Note:

When the VLAN ID values increase or decrease regularly, set the Step to

the difference between two successive values. The item Redo refers to

the count of repeated values prior to calculation of the increment.

10. Select the line Priority or COS, and select 0 from the Initial Value drop-down

list. Use the default values for other parameters.

6-32 Version: B/1

Page 297: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

6 Configuring the Multicast Service

11. Select the line TPID, and enter 33024 in the Initial Value field. Use default

values for other parameters, as shown in Figure 6-30.

Figure 6-30 Modifying the CVLAN Settings in a Batch Manner in the Controllable Mode

12. Configure other parameters according to the planning data.

13. Return to the Port VLAN Config window, and click the Create on Device

button on the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown in Figure 6-31.

Version: B/1 6-33

Page 298: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

Figure 6-31 The Port Service VLAN Configuration Completed in the Controllable Mode

6.2.146.2.14 Enabling the VDSL Ports

Enable the ports of the VD32 card. Users can not configure the parameters for the

ports when they are disabled.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE

manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to

bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common ConfigíPort ConfigíPort

Enable. Select the VD32 card to be configured in the Select Object window

that appears, and then click OK.

4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,

as shown in Figure 6-32.

6-34 Version: B/1

Page 299: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

6 Configuring the Multicast Service

Figure 6-32 Enabling the VDSL Ports (Completed)

6.2.156.2.15 Configuration Result

After completing the configuration of multicast services in the controllable mode,

check the equipment status as follows.

6.2.15.16.2.15.1 Viewing Online Multicast Group Information

View the online multicast group information in the current multicast mode.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE

manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to

bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. Select Get InformationíIGMP Param. InformationíMC Group Statistics in

the Operational Tree pane.

4. In the left pane, select the group addresses 226.0.1.1 and 226.0.1.2

respectively and click Read from Device on the toolbar to read the current

online multicast group information. It shows that two subscribers are watching

the two multicast programs, as shown in Figure 6-33.

Version: B/1 6-35

Page 300: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

Figure 6-33 Checking the Online Multicast Group Information for a Normal User

5. Select the group address 226.0.1.3 in the left pane and click Read from

Device on the toolbar to read the current online multicast group information. It

shows that two subscribers are watching the multicast program, as shown in

Figure 6-34.

Figure 6-34 Checking the Online Multicast Group Information for a Preview User

6.2.15.26.2.15.2 Viewing Online Group Information of Appointed Port

View the online multicast group information at port 1 of the VD32 card in slot 3 in the

current multicast mode.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE

manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to

bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. Select Get InformationíIGMP Param. InformationíOnline IGMP Group

Information For Specific Port in the Operational Tree pane.

6-36 Version: B/1

Page 301: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

6 Configuring the Multicast Service

4. In the left pane, double-click the Slot No. field and enter 3. Then double-click

the Port No. field, and enter 1.

5. Click Read from Device in the toolbar to read the online multicast group

information at the specified port. See Figure 6-35.

Figure 6-35 Viewing the Online Group Information of a Specified Port in the Controllable Mode

6.2.15.36.2.15.3 Viewing the Core Switch Card's Multicast Address Table

View the manage control card's multicast address table in the current multicast

mode.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE

manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to

bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Get InformationíIGMP Param.

InformationíMCU MC Address Table.

4. Click Read from Device in the toolbar to read the multicast address table of

the core switch card. See Figure 6-36.

Version: B/1 6-37

Page 302: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

Figure 6-36 Checking the MCU Card’s Multicast Address Table in the Controlled Mode

6.2.15.46.2.15.4 Viewing the Multicast Address Table of the Line Card

View the multicast address table of the VD32 card in slot 3 in the current multicast

mode.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE

manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to

bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Get InformationíIGMP Param.

InformationíLine Card MC Address Table.

4. In the left pane, double-click the Slot No. field and enter 3.

5. Click Read from Device in the toolbar to read the line card's multicast address

table. See Figure 6-37.

Figure 6-37 Checking the Line Card’s Multicast Address Table in the Controllable Mode

6-38 Version: B/1

Page 303: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

77 Card Software Upgrade

The following introduces how to upgrade the software of cards for the AN5006-20.

Precautions

Upgrading the Management Control Card

Upgrading the Line Card

Upgrading the Uplink Subcard of the MCUA Card

Version: B/1 7-1

Page 304: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

7.17.1 Precautions

Card rebooting is required during upgrade, which may affect the service concerned.

The operators should follow the instructions given below to minimize the impact on

the service.

u It is advised to carry out the upgrade at night when service traffic is at a

relatively low volume.

u Ensure the proper connection between the management VLAN port of the

AN5006-20 and the FTP server. The IP address of the management VLAN and

that of the FTP server are in the same subnet, and users can use the Ping

command on the FTP server to test its connectivity with the equipment before

upgrade operations.

u Save the current software version before the upgrade for fear the upgrade may

fail or the new version may encounter a major problem.

u The file type used for the upgrade should match the card type; otherwise the

upgrade may fail.

u Upgrade the service interface card first and then the management control card,

if both types need upgrade.

7.27.2 Upgrading the Management Control Card

The following introduces how to upgrade the management control card for the

AN5006-20.

7.2.17.2.1 Upgrade Rules

The management control card must be rebooted after upgrade. Therefore, it is

necessary to save the current configuration to the management control card's Flash

and back up the current configuration and the system software to the FTP server.

7.2.27.2.2 Planning Data

The following introduces upgrading the software of the MCUA card as an example.

7-2 Version: B/1

Page 305: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

7 Card Software Upgrade

The planning data for upgrading the management control card software are shown

in Table 7-1.

Table 7-1 Planning Data for Upgrading the Management Control Card

Item Description Example

Related parameters of the card to

be upgraded

The number of the slot

accommodating the

actually used core switch

card

Core switch card in Slot 05

FTP server IPThe IP address of the FTP

server that is actually used10.92.20.168

FTP usernameThe user name of the FTP

server that is actually used1

FTP passwordThe password of the FTP

server that is actually used1

Backing up the

current

configuration

file

Task NameConfigure the file name in

actual use.system

Execution type

Set the cycle to execute

this task. Users can select

one time or a cycle.

One time

Extend

Information

Select the name of the

used FTP server.ftp

Repeated Time 2

Backing up the

system

software

Task NameConfigure the file name in

actual use.config

Execution type

Set the cycle to execute

this task. Users can select

one time or a cycle.

One time

Extend

Information

Select the name of the

used FTP server.ftp

Upgrading the

management

control card

software

Task NameConfigure the file name in

actual use.upgrade

Object source

The card to be upgraded.

Select the core switch

card.

MCUA[5]

Execution type

Set the cycle to execute

this task. Users can select

one time or a cycle.

One time

Extend

Information

Select the name of the

used FTP server.ftp

Version: B/1 7-3

Page 306: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

Table 7-1 Planning Data for Upgrading the Management Control Card (Continued)

Item Description Example

Select or enter the name of

the upgrade file.MCU.bin

7.2.37.2.3 Upgrade Flow

The flow of upgrading the management control card is shown in Figure 7-1.

Figure 7-1 Flow of Upgrading the Management Control Card

7.2.47.2.4 Saving Current Configuration to Flash

Users can save the configuration data into the FLASH to restore the equipment

configuration in case the upgrade fails or the new version has encountered a

problem.

7-4 Version: B/1

Page 307: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

7 Card Software Upgrade

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE

manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to

bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select System ControlíSave Config to Flash

to bring up the Issue the command dialog box, as shown in Figure 7-2.

Figure 7-2 Saving the Configuration into the Flash

4. Click OK, and the system begins to execute the command.

5. After the data saving is completed, click the Close button.

7.2.57.2.5 Backing up the Current Configuration File

Back up all the current configuration files. In case that the upgrade fails, you can

use the backup configuration file to restore the equipment to the state before

upgrade.

Procedure

1. Click the NE to be configured in the Main Topology pane. Select Systemí

Policy Task Management to open the Policy Task Management tab.

Version: B/1 7-5

Page 308: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

2. In the left pane, select Configuration BackupíConfiguration Export Task,

and click Create to open the Create Configuration Export Task dialog box.

3. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

4. Click Execute Now to complete the configuration. See Figure 7-3.

Figure 7-3 Backing up the Current Configuration Data

7.2.67.2.6 Backing up the System Software

Back up the current system software. The system can restore to the software status

before upgrading in case the upgrade fails or a fault occurs in the upgrade version.

Procedure

1. Click the NE to be configured in the Main Topology pane. Select Systemí

Policy Task Management to open the Policy Task Management tab.

2. In the left pane, select Configuration BackupíSoftware Backup Task, and

click Create to open the Create Software Backup Task dialog box.

3. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

4. Click Execute Now to complete the configuration. See Figure 7-4.

Figure 7-4 Backing up the System Software

7.2.77.2.7 Upgrading the Management Control Card Software

The following introduces how to upgrade the management control card's software.

1. Click the NE to be configured in the Main Topology pane. Select Systemí

Policy Task Management to open the Policy Task Management tab.

2. In the left pane, select Upgrade TaskíSystem Software Upgrade Task and

click Create to open the Create System Software Update Task dialog box.

7-6 Version: B/1

Page 309: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

7 Card Software Upgrade

3. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

4. Click Execute now to complete the configuration. See Figure 7-5.

Figure 7-5 Upgrading the Management Control Card

7.2.87.2.8 Resetting the Management Control Card

Reboot the management control card to validate the upgrade configurations.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE

manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to

bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select System ControlíReset to bring up the

Reset dialog box.

4. Select reset core card from the drop-down list of Slot No. field.

5. Click Create on Device on the toolbar to reset the management control card,

as shown in Figure 7-6.

Figure 7-6 Resetting the Management Control Card

7.2.97.2.9 Checking the Software Version of the ManagementControl Card

Check whether the software version of the management control card is correct after

upgrade.

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE

manager.

Version: B/1 7-7

Page 310: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to

bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational tree pane, select Get InformationíCard Version to open

the Card Version tab.

4. Check whether the software version of the management control card in slot 5 is

correct, as shown in Figure 7-7.

Figure 7-7 Checking the Software Version of the Management Control Card

7.37.3 Upgrading the Line Card

The following introduces how to upgrade the line cards for the AN5006-20.

7.3.17.3.1 Upgrade Rules

Upgrade the software of line cards, including the POTS card, the ADSL interface

card, and the VDSL interface card.

u The cards of the same type can be upgraded in a batch manner.

u The procedures of upgrading the POTS card, the ADSL interface card and the

VDSL interface card are the same.

u The downloaded file types are different for the POTS card, the ADSL interface

card and the VDSL interface card. See Table 7-2 for the association between

the upgrade object and the downloaded file type.

Table 7-2 Association between Upgrade Object and Download File Type

Upgrade Object Downloaded File Type

POTS POTS64 Software

POTS32 POTS32 Software

VD32 AD32 Software

AD64 AD64 Software

VD32 VD32 Software

7-8 Version: B/1

Page 311: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

7 Card Software Upgrade

Table 7-2 Association between Upgrade Object and Download File Type (Continued)

Upgrade Object Downloaded File Type

CASA CASA

HDT8A HDT8A

HDT8B HDT8B

HD32A HD32A

7.3.27.3.2 Planning Data

The following illustrates how to upgrade the software of the AD64 cards in slots 2

and 4 as an example. See Table 7-3 for the planning data.

Table 7-3 Planning Data for Upgrading the ADSL Interface Card Software

Item Description Example

Related parameters of the card to be

upgraded

Configure according to the number of the

actually used slot for the service interface

card.

The ADSL64 cards in

slots 2 and 4.

Upgrading the

ADSL Interface

Card

Basic Information

The file name that is actually used. AD64

Set the cycle to execute this task. Users

can select one time or a cycle.One time

Object source Select the card to be upgraded. AD64 card

Extend InformationSelect the name of the used FTP server. ftp

File name. AD64.bin

7.3.37.3.3 Upgrade Flow

The flow of upgrading the ADSL interface card software is shown in Figure 7-8.

Version: B/1 7-9

Page 312: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

Figure 7-8 The Flow of Upgrading the ADSL Interface Card Software

7.3.47.3.4 Upgrading the ADSL Interface Card Software

Procedure

1. Click the NE to be configured in the Main Topology pane. Select Systemí

Policy Task Management to open the Policy Task Management tab.

2. In the left pane, select Upgrade TaskíBatch Upgrade Task of the Service

Card, and click Create to bring up the Batch Upgrade Task of the Service

Card dialog box.

3. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

4. Click Execute now to complete the configuration. See Figure 7-9.

Figure 7-9 Upgrading Software of the ADSL Interface Card in a Batch Manner

7-10 Version: B/1

Page 313: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

7 Card Software Upgrade

7.3.57.3.5 Resetting the ADSL Interface Card

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE

manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to

bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select System ControlíReset to bring up the

Reset tab.

4. Click the Slot No field, select the slot where the upgraded ADSL interface card

is located from the drop-down list, and click Create on Device on the toolbar to

complete the configuration, as shown in Figure 7-10.

Figure 7-10 Resetting the ADSL Interface Card

7.3.67.3.6 Checking the Software Version of the ADSL InterfaceCard

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE

manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to

bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Get InformationíCard Version to open

the Card Version tab, as shown in Figure 7-11.

Figure 7-11 Checking the Software Version of the ADSL Interface Card

Version: B/1 7-11

Page 314: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

7.47.4 Upgrading the Uplink Subcard of the MCUACard

The following introduceshow to upgrade the uplink subcard of the MCUA card.

7.4.17.4.1 Upgrade Rule

The management control card will be reset after the uplink subcard of the MCUA

card is upgraded. Therefore, it is necessary to save the current configuration to the

management control card's flash and back up the current configuration to the FTP

server.

7.4.27.4.2 Planning Data

Table 7-4 shows the planning data for upgrading the uplink subcard of the MCUA

card.

Table 7-4 Planning Data for Upgrading the Uplink Subcard of the MCUA Card

Item Description Example

Downloaded file type Select the E1 uplink subcard E1 uplink subcard

FTP server IP Configure according to the actual conditions. 10.78.20.122

FTP server username Configure according to the actual conditions. 1

FTP server password Configure according to the actual conditions. 1

File NameConfigure according to the actual conditions. The file

name should include no more than 20 characters.V5_RP0101

7.4.37.4.3 Upgrade Flow

Figure 7-12 shows the flow of upgrading the uplink subcard of the MCUA card.

7-12 Version: B/1

Page 315: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

7 Card Software Upgrade

Figure 7-12 Flow of Upgrading the Uplink Subcard of the MCUA Card

7.4.47.4.4 Upgrading the Uplink Subcard of the MCUA Card

1. Click the NE to be configured in the Main Topology pane. Select Systemí

Policy Task Management to open the Policy Task Management tab.

2. In the left pane, select Upgrade TaskíSystem Software Upgrade Task and

click Create to open the Create System Software Update Task dialog box.

3. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

4. Click Execute now, as shown in Figure 7-13.

Figure 7-13 Upgrading the Uplink Subcard of the MCUA Card

7.4.57.4.5 Resetting the Uplink Subcard of the MCUA Card

Reboot the management control card to validate the upgrade configurations.

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE

manager.

Version: B/1 7-13

Page 316: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to

bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select System ControlíReset to bring up the

Reset dialog box.

4. Select reset core card from the drop-down list of Slot No. field.

5. Click Create on Device on the toolbar to reset the management control card,

as shown in Figure 7-14.

Figure 7-14 Rebooting the Uplink Subcard of the MCUA Card

7.4.67.4.6 Viewing Software Version of the MCUA Card's UplinkSubcard

The following introduces how to check the software version of the MCUA card's

uplink subcard after upgrading.

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE

manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to

bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Get InformationíCard Version to open

the Card Version tab.

4. Check whether the software version of the MCUA card's uplink subcard in Slot

802 is correct, as shown in Figure 7-15.

Figure 7-15 Viewing Software Version of the MCUA Card's Uplink Subcard

7-14 Version: B/1

Page 317: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

88 Configuring Link Aggregation

The following introduces differences between the AN5006-20 manual link

aggregation mode and the static LACP aggregation mode and the configure method

of the two link aggregations.

Configuration Example of Manual Aggregation Mode

Configuration Example of Static LACPAggregation Mode

Version: B/1 8-1

Page 318: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

8.18.1 Configuration Example of ManualAggregation Mode

The following introduces how to configure manual aggregation mode.

8.1.18.1.1 Configuration Rules

u Two aggregation modes are applicable to the AN5006-20: manual or static

LACP. Users need to configure only one of them.

u The AN5006-20 supports two aggregation groups.

u An aggregation group may have 2 to 4 member ports.

8.1.28.1.2 Network Diagram

Service Planning

The GE3 and GE4 ports of the MCUA card on the AN5006-20 make up a manual

aggregation port group.

Network Diagram

Taking the MCUA card as an example, see Figure 8-1 for the manual aggregation

network diagram.

8-2 Version: B/1

Page 319: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

8 Configuring Link Aggregation

Figure 8-1 Manual Aggregation Network Diagram

The GE3 and GE4 uplink ports of the MCUA card are connected to the upper layer

switch and the ports are added manually to the aggregation group via the network

management system, so as to achieve load sharing in the aggregation group. When

one of the physical links fails, traffic can be automatically switched to other links in

the aggregation group.

Hardware Configuration

The equipment uses the MCUA card to enable manual port aggregation.

8.1.38.1.3 Planning Data

Table 8-1 shows the planning data of the manual aggregation mode.

Version: B/1 8-3

Page 320: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

Table 8-1 Planning Data of Manual Aggregation Mode

Item Description Example

Configuring the

properties of the

Ethernet ports of

the management

control card

Slot No.The slot number of the management control

card in actual use.5

Port No.The port number of the management control

card in actual use.GE3 GE4

Auto-negotiationEnables or disables the auto-negotiation of the

Ethernet port.Disable

RateThe Ethernet port and the GE port support rates

of 10Mbps, 100Mbps and 1000Mbps.1000M

Duplex

Sets the duplex mode of the uplink port. The

mode includes full duplex mode and half duplex

mode. Duplex mode is used by default.

Full duplex

Flow controlEnables or disables the flow control function of

the Ethernet port. The default value is Disable.Disable

Port address

learning

Enables or disables the address learning

function of the Ethernet port. Enabled by default.Enable

Port priorityEnables or disables the port priority function.

Enabled by default.Enable

Port priority value

The service priority value of the Ethernet port,

ranging from 0 to 7. 7 is the highest priority while

0 is the lowest priority. The default setting is 0.

0

Interface mode

The interface mode of the Ethernet port;

includes SerDes and SGMII. The default value

is SerDes. When the Ethernet port uses the

optical module or forced GE electrical module,

the SerDes mode is configured. When the

Ethernet port uses the 10 / 100 / 1000 Mbps

electrical mode, the SMGII mode is configured.

SerDes

Configuring link

aggregation

groups

Group IDThe AN5006-20 supports two link aggregate

groups; automatically generated by the system.1

Mode

Configure the link aggregation mode of the

AN5006-20 according to the network planning of

the operator.

Manual Aggregation

Configuring the

Aggregation Port

Group IDThe AN5006-20 supports two link aggregate

groups; automatically generated by the system.1

Member Port

Number

Add the group member port to the LAG

manually according to the network planning of

the operator.

GE3 GE4

8-4 Version: B/1

Page 321: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

8 Configuring Link Aggregation

8.1.48.1.4 Configuration Flow

See Figure 8-2 for the configuration flow of the manual aggregation.

Figure 8-2 Flow of Configuring Manual Aggregation

8.1.58.1.5 Configuring the Ethernet Port of the ManagementControl Card

Configure the properties of the GE3 and GE4 ports of the MCUA card.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE

manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to

bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Data ServiceíMCU Ethernet Port to

open the MCU Ethernet Port tab.

4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,

as shown in Figure 8-3.

Version: B/1 8-5

Page 322: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

Figure 8-3 Configuring the Ethernet Ports of the Management Control Card - Manual

Aggregation

8.1.68.1.6 Configuring the Aggregation Mode

The following introduces how to configure the aggregation mode of the aggregation

group for the AN5006-20.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE

manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to

bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Ethernet ConfigíAggregationí

Aggregation Group to bring up the Aggregation Group tab.

4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,

as shown in Figure 8-4.

Figure 8-4 Configuring Aggregation Mode - Manual Aggregation

8.1.78.1.7 Configuring the Aggregation Ports

Set the GE3 and GE4 ports of the MCUA card to the member ports of the manual

aggregation group.

8-6 Version: B/1

Page 323: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

8 Configuring Link Aggregation

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE

manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to

bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Ethernet ConfigíAggregationí

Aggregation Port Config to bring up the Aggregation Port Config tab.

4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,

as shown in Figure 8-5.

Figure 8-5 Configuring Aggregation Ports - Manual Aggregation

8.1.88.1.8 Configuration Result

The traffic will achieve load sharing automatically on the uplink ports GE3 and GE4

of the link aggregation group on the MCUA card. If one physical link is faulty, traffic

can automatically switch to the other links of the aggregation group.

8.28.2 Configuration Example of Static LACPAggregation Mode

The following introduces how to configure the static LACP aggregation mode.

8.2.18.2.1 Configuration Rules

u Two aggregation modes are applicable to the AN5006-20: manual and static

LACP. Users need to configure only one of them.

u The AN5006-20 supports two aggregation groups.

Version: B/1 8-7

Page 324: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

u An aggregation group may have 2 to 4 member ports.

8.2.28.2.2 Network Diagram

Service Planning

The GE3 and GE4 ports of the MCUA card on the AN5006-20 make up an LACP

aggregation port group.

Network Diagram

The network of the static LACP aggregation is shown in Figure 8-6. Here the MCUA

card is taken as an example.

Figure 8-6 Static LACPAggregation Network Diagram

8-8 Version: B/1

Page 325: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

8 Configuring Link Aggregation

Connect the GE3 and GE4 uplink ports of the MCUA card with the upper layer

switch, enable the LACP function and add the ports manually to the LAG. The

equipment and the switch determine the link aggregation ports via LACP interaction.

When one of the physical links fails, traffic can be automatically switched to other

links in the aggregation group.

Hardware Configuration

The equipment uses the MCUA card to enable LACP port aggregation.

8.2.38.2.3 Planning Data

See Table 8-2 for the planning data of static LACP aggregation mode.

Table 8-2 Planning Data of Static LACPAggregation Mode

Item Description Example

Configuring the

properties of the

Ethernet ports of

the management

control card

Slot No.The slot number of the management control card

in actual use.5

Port No.The port number of the management control card

in actual use.GE3 GE4

Auto-negotiationEnables or disables the auto-negotiation of the

Ethernet port.Disable

RateThe Ethernet port and the GE port support rates

of 10Mbps, 100Mbps and 1000Mbps.1000M

Duplex

Sets the duplex mode of the uplink port. The

mode includes full duplex mode and half duplex

mode. Duplex mode is used by default.

Full duplex

Flow controlEnables or disables the flow control function of

the Ethernet port. The default value is Disable.Disable

Port address

learning

Enables or disables the address learning

function of the Ethernet port. Enabled by default.Enable

Port priorityEnables or disables the port priority function.

Enabled by default.Enable

Port priority value

The service priority value of the Ethernet port,

ranging from 0 to 7. 7 is the highest priority while

0 is the lowest priority. The default setting is 0.

0

Version: B/1 8-9

Page 326: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

Table 8-2 Planning Data of Static LACPAggregation Mode (Continued)

Item Description Example

Interface mode

The interface mode of the Ethernet port; includes

SerDes and SGMII. The default value is SerDes.

When the Ethernet port uses the optical module

or forced GE electrical module, the SerDes mode

is configured. When the Ethernet port uses the

10 / 100 / 1000 Mbps electrical mode, the SMGII

mode is configured.

SerDes

Configuring

LACP global

parameters

LACP switch Enable the static LACP switch Enable

System priority

Configure the system priority of the AN5006-20

according to the network planning of the

operator.

32768

System ID The CPU MAC address of the AN5006-20 00-0a-c2-88-77-44

Configuring

LACP port

parameters

Port No.

Configure the port number of the link aggregation

according to the network planning of the

operator.

GE3 GE4

Port priority The default setting is 32768. 32768

Operation key The default setting is 1. 1

TimerConfigure the port timer type according to the

network planning of the operator.Long Timeout

Configuring link

aggregation

groups

Group IDThe AN5006-20 Supports two link aggregate

groups; automatically generated by the system.1

Mode

Configure the link aggregation mode of the

AN5006-20 according to the network planning of

the operator.

Static LACP

Configuring the

Aggregation Port

Group IDThe AN5006-20 supports two link aggregate

groups; automatically generated by the system.1

Member Port

Number

Add the member GE port to the LAG manually

according to the network planning of the

operator.

GE3 GE4

8.2.48.2.4 Configuration Flow

The configuration flow of the static LACP aggregation mode is shown in Figure 8-7.

8-10 Version: B/1

Page 327: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

8 Configuring Link Aggregation

Figure 8-7 Configuration Flow of Static LACPAggregation

8.2.58.2.5 Configuring the Ethernet Port of the ManagementControl Card

Configure the properties of the GE3 and GE4 ports on the MCUA card.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE

manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to

bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Data ServiceíMCU Ethernet Port to

open the MCU Ethernet Port tab.

4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,

as shown in Figure 8-8.

Version: B/1 8-11

Page 328: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

Figure 8-8 Configuring the Ethernet Ports of the Management Control Card - Static LACP

Aggregation

8.2.68.2.6 Configuring LACP Global Parameters

The following introduces how to configure the LACP function of the AN5006-20.

When the LACP function is enabled, the equipment will run the LACP, perform

protocol interaction with the uplink switch and determine the link aggregation ports.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE

manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to

bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Ethernet ConfigíAggregationíLACP

Global Config to bring up the LACP Global Config tab.

4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,

as shown in Figure 8-9.

Figure 8-9 Configuring LACP Global Parameters

8-12 Version: B/1

Page 329: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

8 Configuring Link Aggregation

8.2.78.2.7 Configuring the LACP Port Parameters

The following introduces how to configure the LACP parameters of the aggregation

ports.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE

manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to

bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Ethernet ConfigíAggregationíLACP

Port Config to bring up the LACP Port Config tab.

4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,

as shown in Figure 8-10.

Figure 8-10 Configuring the LACP Port Parameters

8.2.88.2.8 Configuring the Aggregation Mode

The following introduces how to configure the aggregation mode of the aggregation

group for the AN5006-20.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE

manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to

bring up the Local Service Config tab.

Version: B/1 8-13

Page 330: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Ethernet ConfigíAggregationí

Aggregation Group to bring up the Aggregation Group tab.

4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,

as shown in Figure 8-11.

Figure 8-11 Configuring Aggregation Mode - Static LACPAggregation

8.2.98.2.9 Configuring the Aggregation Ports

Set the GE3 and GE4 ports of the MCUA card to the member ports of the static

LACP aggregation group manually.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE

manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to

bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Ethernet ConfigíAggregationí

Aggregation Port Config to bring up the Aggregation Port Config tab.

4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,

as shown in Figure 8-12.

Figure 8-12 Configuring Aggregation Ports - Static LACPAggregation

8-14 Version: B/1

Page 331: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

8 Configuring Link Aggregation

8.2.108.2.10 Configuration Result

The GE3 and GE4 uplink ports of the MCUA card are added to the static LACP

aggregation group manually. And the equipment runs the LACP, performs protocol

interaction with the uplink switch and determines the link aggregation ports.

Version: B/1 8-15

Page 332: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device
Page 333: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

99 Configuring the Power andEnvironment Monitoring

The following introduces how to configure the power supply and environment

monitoring for the AN5006-20.

Configuring Environment Monitoring

Configuring the Environment Monitoring Parameters

Configuring the Charging Mode

Resetting the HCU-20 Card

Enabling the Rectifier Module

Viewing the Instant Performance of the HCU-20 Card

Viewing Current Alarms of the HCU-20 Card

Viewing the Alarm History of the HCU-20 Card

Version: B/1 9-1

Page 334: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

9.19.1 Configuring Environment Monitoring

The following introduces how to configure environment monitoring.

9.1.19.1.1 Configuration Rules

u An HCU-20 card or a port on the HCU-20 card can be bound to only one

threshold profile, while a threshold profile can be bound to multiple ports.

u The alarms are divided into two categories: status alarms and threshold alarms.

4 The status alarms are reported by the HCU-20 card indicating abnormal

state of the system.

4 As for the threshold alarms, users can set the alarm threshold values via

the threshold profile, and the system compares its performance values

with the threshold values to decide whether to report the alarms or clear

the alarms.

u Table 9-1 shows the relationship among the alarm codes, alarm report

threshold ranges and default values, and alarm clearing threshold ranges and

default values.

Table 9-1 Relationship among Alarm Codes, Alarm Report Threshold Parameters and Alarm

Clearing Threshold Parameters

Alarm Code Alarm TypeAlarm Report Threshold

Setting

Alarm Clearing Threshold

SettingUnit

HUM_DOWNThreshold

alarm

[0.00,19.90]; the default value is

0.00.

[0.00,19.90]; the default value is

0.00.%RH

ENV_TEMP_

DOWN

Threshold

alarm

[0.00,19.90]; the default value is

0.00.

[0.00,19.90]; the default value is

0.00.⇤

HUM_OVERThreshold

alarm

[50.00,109.90]; the default value

is 90.00.

[50.00,109.90]; the default value is

90.00.%RH

ENV_TEMP_

OVER

Threshold

alarm

[35.00,70.00]; the default value

is 55.00.

[35.00,70.00]; the default value is

55.00.⇤

ACVOLOVERThreshold

alarm

[230.00,300.00]; the default

value is 280.00.

[230.00,300.00]; the default value

is 280.00.V

ACVOLDOWNThreshold

alarm

[130.00,220.00]; the default

value is 170.00.

[130.00,220.00]; the default value

is 170.00.V

DCVOLOVERThreshold

alarm

[55.00,58.50]; the default value

is 57.00.

[55.00,58.50]; the default value is

57.00.V

9-2 Version: B/1

Page 335: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

9 Configuring the Power and Environment Monitoring

Table 9-1 Relationship among Alarm Codes, Alarm Report Threshold Parameters and Alarm

Clearing Threshold Parameters (Continued)

Alarm Code Alarm TypeAlarm Report Threshold

Setting

Alarm Clearing Threshold

SettingUnit

DCVOLDOWNThreshold

alarm

[42.00,50.00]; the default value

is 45.00.

[42.00,50.00]; the default value is

45.00.V

OVERCURREThreshold

alarm

[10.00,39.90]; the default value

is 30.00.

[10.00,39.90]; the default value is

30.00.A

BDCVLOVERThreshold

alarm

[50.00,69.90]; the default value

is 59.00.

[50.00,69.90]; the default value is

59.00.V

BDCVLDOWNThreshold

alarm

[43.00,49.00]; the default value

is 45.00.

[43.00,49.00]; the default value is

45.00.V

RETEMP-

OVER

Threshold

alarm

[40.00,90.00]; the default value

is 80.00.

[40.00,90.00]; the default value is

80.00.⇤

BATTERY_

TEMPERA-

TURE_OVER_

THRESHOLD_

ALARM

Threshold

alarm

[40.00,89.90]; the default value

is 60.00.

[40.00,89.90]; the default value is

60.00.⇤

ARRESTER_

BREAK

Status

alarm- - -

FIRE_ALARMStatus

alarm- - -

DOOR_

ACCESS

Status

alarm- - -

BATTERY_

FUSE_BREAK

Status

alarm- - -

LOAD_FUSE_

BREAK

Status

alarm- - -

AC_

BREAKER_

OPEN

Status

alarm- - -

RECTIFIER_

MODULE_

ALARM

Status

alarm- - -

FAN_ALARMStatus

alarm- - -

HEAT_ALARMStatus

alarm- - -

SHAKEStatus

alarm- - -

Version: B/1 9-3

Page 336: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

Table 9-1 Relationship among Alarm Codes, Alarm Report Threshold Parameters and Alarm

Clearing Threshold Parameters (Continued)

Alarm Code Alarm TypeAlarm Report Threshold

Setting

Alarm Clearing Threshold

SettingUnit

INFRARED_

DETECT_

ALARM

Status

alarm- - -

FLOODStatus

alarm- - -

SMOKEStatus

alarm- - -

AIR_

CONDITION-

ER_ALARM

Status

alarm- - -

AC_POWER_

FAIL

Status

alarm- - -

9.1.29.1.2 Planning Data

The following illustrates how to bind the threshold profile to the HCU-20 card as an

example. See Table 9-2 for the planning data.

Table 9-2 Planning Data for Configuring the Environment Monitoring Instance

Item Description Example

Configuring

the

threshold

profile

Profile ID Read only. -

Profile Name

Configure it according to actual situation. Maximum length:

20 characters. The acceptable character collection is 0 to 9,

a to z, A to Z and the underline.

test1

Object Class

Configure this item according to the planning of the

operator. The options include board and port.. When the

Object Class is set to None, the Object Type is null; when

the Object Class is set to other values, set the Object Type

to the one corresponding to the object class. For the

configuration of the equipment power supply and

environment monitoring, only two options are valid: Board

and Port.

Board

9-4 Version: B/1

Page 337: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

9 Configuring the Power and Environment Monitoring

Table 9-2 Planning Data for Configuring the Environment Monitoring Instance (Continued)

Item Description Example

Object Type

Configure it according to actual situation.

If the Object Class is set to Board, the Object Type should

be set to HCU-20.

If the Object Class is set to Port, the Object Type should be

set to LINE-20.

HCU-20

Alarm Code

Configure this item according to the planning of the

operator.

If the Object Class is set to Board, the alarm code options

include HUM_DOWN, ENV_TEMP_DOWN, ACVOLOVER,

ACVOLDOWN, DCVOLOVER, DCVOLDOWN, HUM_

OVER, ENV_TEMP_OVER, etc.

If the Object Class is set to Port, the alarm code options

includeOVERCURRE, BDCVLOVER, BDCVLDOWN,

RETEMPOVER, BATTERY_TEMPERATURE_OVER_

THRESHOLD_ALARM, BATTERY_TEMPERATURE_

DOWN_THRESHOLD_ALARM, etc.

ACVOLOVER

AlarmThresholdS-

witch

Configure the item according to the network planning of the

operator. The options are Enable and Disable.

When it is set to Enable, the NMS will deliver the threshold

profile parameters configured by the users to the equipment.

When it is set to Disable, the NMS will deliver the default

settings of the threshold profile to the equipment.

Enable

AlarmReportThres-

hold

If the alarm type is set to an overhigh performance value,

the NMS will report the alarm when the performance value

of the HCU-20 card or a port on the HCU-20 card is higher

than the set value.

If the alarm type is set to an overlow performance value, the

NMS will report the alarm when the performance value of

the HCU-20 card or a port on the HCU-20 card is lower than

the set value.

280.00

AlarmReportThre-

sholdRange

Read only. The alarm report threshold value should be set

within the alarm report threshold range.[230.00,300.00]

Version: B/1 9-5

Page 338: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

Table 9-2 Planning Data for Configuring the Environment Monitoring Instance (Continued)

Item Description Example

ClearingAlarm-

Threshold

If the alarm type is set to an overhigh performance value,

the NMS will clear the alarm when the performance value of

the HCU-20 card or a port on the HCU-20 card is lower than

the set value and display the alarm end time. The value of

the ClearingAlarmThreshold should be smaller than or equal

to the value of AlarmReportThreshold in this case.

If the alarm type is set to an overlow performance value, the

NMS will prompt that the alarm is cleared when the

performance value of the HCU-20 card or a port on the

HCU-20 card is higher than the set value. The value of the

ClearingAlarmThreshold should be larger than or equal to

the AlarmReportThreshold in this case.

If the AlarmReportThreshold and ClearingAlarmThreshold

are set to the same value, there is only one threshold value

for the alarm. If the alarm type is set to an overhigh

performance value, the alarm will be cleared when the

actual performance value is lower than the threshold value.

If the alarm type is set to an overlow performance value, the

alarm will be cleared when the actual performance value is

higher than the threshold value.

280.00

ClearingAlarmThre-

sholdRange

Read only. The clearing alarm threshold value should be set

within the clearing alarm threshold range.[230.00,300.00]

Binding the

threshold

profile

Object Name Select the HCU-20 card or a port on the card. HCU-20

Profile Name

The name of the existing threshold profile. For a bound

threshold profile, you can select Unbind from the drop-down

list to unbind it from the HCU-20 card or the port of the HCU-

20 card.

test1

9-6 Version: B/1

Page 339: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

9 Configuring the Power and Environment Monitoring

9.1.39.1.3 Configuration Flow

Figure 9-1 Flow of Configuring Environment Alarm Instance

9.1.49.1.4 Configuring the Threshold Profile

This command is used to configure the alarm codes, the threshold values for

clearing and reporting the alarms of the threshold profile, and enable threshold

alarming by binding the profile to a card or a port.

Note:

A bound threshold profile cannot be deleted unless being unbound first.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE

manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to

bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Performance ManagementíThreshold

Profile and BindíPM Threshold Profile to bring up the PM Threshold

Profile tab.

4. Click the blank area on the left side of the PM Threshold Profile tab, click the

Add button on the toolbar, and enter 1 in the Enter the number of rows to add

dialog box that appears. Then click OK.

Version: B/1 9-7

Page 340: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

5. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

6. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,

as shown in Figure 9-2.

Figure 9-2 Configuring the Environment Monitoring Threshold Profile

9.1.59.1.5 Binding the Threshold Profile

This command is used to bind the threshold profile to the HCU-20 card or the port

on the HCU-20 card, so as to perform the threshold alarm. The following takes

binding the threshold profile to the HCU-20 card as an example.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE

manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to

bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Performance ManagementíThreshold

Profile and BindíPM Threshold Profile Bind to bring up the PM Threshold

Profile Bind tab.

4. One the left pane of the tab, select the HCU-20 card or a port on the card, and

then select test1 from the drop-down list of the corresponding profile name on

the right pane.

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,

as shown in Figure 9-3.

Figure 9-3 Binding the Environment Monitoring Threshold Profile

9-8 Version: B/1

Page 341: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

9 Configuring the Power and Environment Monitoring

9.1.69.1.6 Configuration End

Configure a threshold profile with the alarm code ACVOLOVER (AC voltage

overhigh), and bind the profile with the HCU-20 card. When the AC voltage of the

card is higher than the set alarm report threshold, the NMS will report the alarm.

When the AC voltage of the card is lower than the set clearing alarm threshold, the

alarm will be cleared.

9.29.2 Configuring the Environment MonitoringParameters

Configure the parameters of the power system for the HCU-20 card to guarantee

normal operation of the power system and ensure reliability of the power supply.

The planning data for configuring the parameters of environment monitoring are

shown in Table 9-3.

Table 9-3 Planning Data for Configuring the Environment Monitoring Parameters

Item Description Example

Configuring the

environment

monitoring

parameters

Slot No.

Read-only. The HCU-20 card is managed as a

particular card with a dedicated slot number

801 in the network management system.

801

Batteryfill back

coefficient value

Configure this item according to the planning

of the operator. The value ranges from 0.0 to

999.0, and the default value is 0.0.

0.0

Batteryfill value

Configure this item according to the planning

of the operator. The value ranges from 0.0 to

999.0, and the default value is 0.0.

0.0

Batteryfill limit_current

value (A)

Configure this item according to the planning

of the operator. The value ranges from 1.0 to

999.0, and the default value is 8.0 (unit: A).

8.0

Batteryfill circle value

(H)

Configure this item according to the planning

of the operator. The value ranges from 0.0 to

999.0, and the default value is 0.0 (unit: H).

0.0

Batteryfill time value

(H)

Configure this item according to the planning

of the operator. The value ranges from 0.0 to

999.0, and the default value is 0.0 (unit: H).

0.0

Battery_fill time

stoptime (H)

Configure this item according to the planning

of the operator. The value ranges from 0.0 to

999.0, and the default value is 0.0 (unit: H).

0.0

Version: B/1 9-9

Page 342: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

Table 9-3 Planning Data for Configuring the Environment Monitoring Parameters (Continued)

Item Description Example

temperature_

compensate_

coefficient

Configure this item according to the planning

of the operator. The value ranges from 0.0 to

200.0, and the default value is 0.0.

0.0

Temperature Batteryfill

Basic (⇤)

Configure this item according to the planning

of the operator. The value ranges from 10.0 to

30.0, and the default value is 25.0 (unit:⇤).

25.0

Volt Fill Adjust Value

Configure this item according to the planning

of the operator. The value ranges from 0.0 to

999.0, and the default value is 0.0.

0.0

Temperature Fill Adjust

Value

Configure this item according to the planning

of the operator. The value ranges from 0.0 to

999.0, and the default value is 0.0.

0.0

Communte float

charge volt (V)

Configure this item according to the planning

of the operator. The value ranges from 45.0 to

57.0, and the default value is 54.0 (unit: V).

54.0

Communte equal

charge volt (V)

Configure this item according to the planning

of the operator. The value ranges from 52.0 to

58.5, and the default value is 55.0 (unit: V).

55.0

Communte num (Unit)

Configure this item according to the planning

of the operator. The value ranges from 0 to 12,

and the default value is 2 (unit: Unit).

2

Battery Capacity (AH)

Configure this item according to the planning

of the operator. The value ranges from 1.0 to

999.0, and the default value is 100.0 (unit:

AH).

100.0

Sound Alarm Switch

Configure this item according to the planning

of the operator. Two options are available:

"open" and "close".

close

Battery switch volt (V)

Configure this item according to the planning

of the operator. The value ranges from 40.0 to

47.0, and the default value is 43.0 (unit: V).

43.0

Load switch volt (V)

Configure this item according to the planning

of the operator. The value ranges from 40.0 to

50.0, and the default value is 45.0 (unit: V).

45.0

Communte limit_

current value (A)

Configure this item according to the planning

of the operator. The value ranges from 2.0 to

50.0, and the default value is 11.0 (unit: A).

11.0

9-10 Version: B/1

Page 343: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

9 Configuring the Power and Environment Monitoring

Table 9-3 Planning Data for Configuring the Environment Monitoring Parameters (Continued)

Item Description Example

Discharge turn EQ

voltage (V)

Configure this item according to the planning

of the operator. The value ranges from 43.0 to

51.0, and the default value is 48.0 (unit: V).

48.0

Discharge turn EQ

time (min)

Configure this item according to the planning

of the operator. The value ranges from 30.0 to

60.0, and the default value is 30.0 (unit: min).

30.0

Discharge turn EQ

capacity (%)

Configure this item according to the planning

of the operator. The value ranges from 10.0 to

90.0, and the default value is 60.0 (unit: %).

60.0

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE

manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to

bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common ConfigíHCU Para Config to

open the HCU Para Config tab.

4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,

as shown in Figure 9-4.

Figure 9-4 Configuring Environment Monitoring Parameters

9.39.3 Configuring the Charging Mode

Configure the charging mode for the storage battery using the HCU-20 card.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE

manager.

Version: B/1 9-11

Page 344: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to

bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, selectCommon ConfigíCharging mode to

bring up the Charging mode tab.

4. Select the desired charging mode.

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,

as shown in Figure 9-5.

Figure 9-5 Configuring the Charging Mode

9.49.4 Resetting the HCU-20 Card

The following introduces how to reset the HCU-20 card.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE

manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to

bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select System ControlíReset to bring up the

Reset tab. Select reset card 801 from the drop-down list of the Slot No..

4. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,

as shown in Figure 9-6.

Figure 9-6 Resetting the HCU-20 Card

9.59.5 Enabling the Rectifier Module

The following introduces how to enable the rectifier module.

9-12 Version: B/1

Page 345: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

9 Configuring the Power and Environment Monitoring

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE

manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to

bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common ConfigíRectifier module

enable to bring up the Rectifier module enable tab.

4. Double-click the Module No. field, fill in the number of the rectifier module to be

configured, and then select Enable or Disable.

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,

as shown in Figure 9-7.

Figure 9-7 Enabling the Rectifier Module

9.69.6 Viewing the Instant Performance of the HCU-20 Card

The following introduces how to view the instant performance of the HCU-20 card.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE

manager.

2. Right-click the HCU-20 card in the Equipment View, and select Current

Performance from the shortcut menu that appears to bring up the Current

Performance tab. Then you can check the instant performance of the current

HCU card. See Figure 9-8.

Version: B/1 9-13

Page 346: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

Figure 9-8 Checking the Instant Performance of the HCU Card

9.79.7 Viewing Current Alarms of the HCU-20 Card

The following introduces how to view the current alarms of the HCU-20 card.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE

manager.

2. Right-click the HCU-20 card in the Equipment Device, and select Current

Alarm from the shortcut menu that appears to bring up the Current Alarm tab.

Then you can check the alarms currently existing in the HCU card. See

Figure 9-9.

Figure 9-9 Viewing the Current Alarms of the HCU Card

9-14 Version: B/1

Page 347: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

9 Configuring the Power and Environment Monitoring

9.89.8 Viewing the Alarm History of the HCU-20Card

The following introduces how to view the alarm history of the HCU-20 card.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE

manager.

2. Right-click the HCU-20 card in the Equipment View, and select Alarm History

from the shortcut menu that appears to bring up the Alarm History tab. Then

you can check the alarm history of the HCU card. See Figure 9-10.

Figure 9-10 Checking the Alarm History of the HCU Card

Version: B/1 9-15

Page 348: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device
Page 349: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

1010 Test Function

The following introduces the subscriber line test function and the Ping test function

of the AN5006-20.

Subscriber Internal Line Test

Subscriber External Line Test

Ping Test

Version: B/1 10-1

Page 350: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

10.110.1 Subscriber Internal Line Test

The following introduces how to configure the subscriber internal line test.

10.1.110.1.1 Test Rules

The tests can be divided into forcible and non-forcible tests. A forcible test will be

performed even when the user is in conversation, and the conversation will be

interrupted during the test. A non-forcible test will not be performed when the user is

in conversation. Usually a non-forcible test is recommended.

10.1.210.1.2 Signal Flow

The signal flow of the subscriber internal line test is shown in Figure 10-1.

Figure 10-1 Signal Flow of the Subscriber Internal Line Test

The signal flow in the subscriber internal line test is described as follows.

1. The UNM2000 delivers the internal line test command to the management

control card.

2. The management control card receives the test command from the network

management system and checks the command parameters, including the

parameter range, and whether the line card is present and is the service card

supporting the voice function. If no fault exists, the management control card

will send the test command to the corresponding line card, and meanwhile

send the feedback information to the UNM2000, indicating that the test

command is successfully delivered.

3. Upon receiving the test command, the line card performs the line test. Each

time when it completes a port test, the line card will report to the management

control card that the test is completed (excluding the test result).

10-2 Version: B/1

Page 351: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

10 Test Function

10.1.310.1.3 Test Procedure

Figure 10-2 shows the flow chart for the subscriber internal line test.

Figure 10-2 The Flow of Subscriber Internal Line Test

10.1.410.1.4 Configuring the Subscriber Internal Line Test

The internal line test can be used to check whether the POTS card is normal and

facilitate fault isolation. Here we take Port 1 of the POTS card in Slot 4 as an

example.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE

manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to

bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common Configí112 Test to bring up

the 112 Test tab.

4. Select the line with the port number 1, and then select Inline Test from the

drop-down list of the Test Mode field, and no force test from the Test Type

field.

5. Select the current line, and click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to

apply the configuration to the equipment, as shown in Figure 10-3.

Version: B/1 10-3

Page 352: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

Figure 10-3 Configuring Subscriber Internal Line Test

10.1.510.1.5 Checking the Subscriber Internal Line Test Result

Check the result of the subscriber internal line test.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE

manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to

bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Get InformationíInline Test to open the

Inline Test tab.

4. In the Switch Object pane, select POTS64[1], and then select Port 1. The

equipment reads the configuration, as shown in Figure 10-4.

Figure 10-4 Checking the Subscriber Internal Line Test Result

10.1.610.1.6 Test Completed

The Test State has three options:

u completed: The test is completed.

u testing: The test is in progress.

u waiting: The UNM2000 has not yet issued the test command.

10-4 Version: B/1

Page 353: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

10 Test Function

Below are the two test results:

u Succeed: The test is completed successfully.

u Refused: The test fails. The Refuse Reason is that the port is being tested or is

in use.

The parameters like Signal Tone State, Feeder Voltage State, and Loop Current

State are in either of the two states: normal or abnormal.

10.210.2 Subscriber External Line Test

The following introduces how to configure the subscriber external line test.

10.2.110.2.1 Test Rules

The tests can be divided into forcible and non-forcible tests. A forcible test will be

performed even when the user is in conversation, and the conversation will be

interrupted during the test. A non-forcible test will not be performed when the user is

in conversation. Usually a non-forcible test is recommended.

10.2.210.2.2 Signal Flow

Figure 10-5 shows the signal flow in the subscriber external line test.

Figure 10-5 Signal Flow of the Subscriber External Line Test

The signal flow in the subscriber external line test is described as follows.

1. The UNM2000 delivers the external line test command to the management

control card.

Version: B/1 10-5

Page 354: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

2. The management control card receives the test command from the network

management system and checks the command parameters, including the

parameter range, and whether the line card is present and is the service card

supporting the voice function. If no fault exists, the management control card

will send the test command to the corresponding line card, and meanwhile

send the feedback information to the UNM2000, indicating that the test

command is successfully delivered.

3. Upon receiving the test command, the line card performs the line test. Each

time when it completes a port test, the line card will report to the management

control card that the test is completed (excluding the test result).

10.2.310.2.3 Test Procedure

Figure 10-6 shows the flow of subscriber external line test.

Figure 10-6 Flow of Subscriber External Line Test

10.2.410.2.4 Configuring the Subscriber External Line Test

When a fault occurs in the subscriber telephone line, the external line test can be

implemented to check whether the physical connection of the POTS card is normal

and facilitate fault isolation. Here we take Port 1 of the POTS card in Slot 1 as an

example.

10-6 Version: B/1

Page 355: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

10 Test Function

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE

manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to

bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common Configí112 Test to bring up

the 112 Test tab.

4. Click the Add button in the toolbar. In the Enter the number of rows to add

dialog box that appears subsequently, type 1 and click OK to add a

configuration entry.

5. Double-click the Test Mode field and select OutLine Test from the drop-down

list.

6. Double-click the Test Type field and select no force test from the drop-down

list.

7. Click the Create on Device button in the toolbar to apply the configuration to

the equipment, as shown in Figure 10-7.

Figure 10-7 Configuring the Subscriber External Line Test

10.2.510.2.5 Checking the Subscriber External Line Test Result

Check the 112 external line test result.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE

manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to

bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Get InformationíOutline Test to open

the Outline Test tab.

Version: B/1 10-7

Page 356: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

4. In the Switch Object pane, select POTS64[1], and then select Port 1. The

equipment reads the configuration, as shown in Figure 10-8.

Figure 10-8 Checking the Subscriber External Line Test Result

10.2.610.2.6 Test Completed

The Test State has three options:

u completed: The test is completed.

u testing: The test is in progress.

u waiting: The UNM2000 has not yet issued the test command.

Below are the two test results:

u Succeed: The test is completed successfully.

u Refused: The test fails. The Refuse Reason is that the port is being tested or is

in use.

The Port Status and the corresponding fault causes are described as follows:

u normal: The subscriber line is connected with the phone.

u line break: The subscriber line is not connected with the phone and the port

status is abnormal.

u shorted: The subscriber line A is connected with the subscriber line B, and the

port status is abnormal.

u poor insulation: The subscriber line is grounded, and the port is in abnormal

status.

u Not hung up: The telephone is not hung up, and the port status is abnormal.

u Line interfere: The subscriber lines A and B are connected with the battery, and

the port status is abnormal.

10-8 Version: B/1

Page 357: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

10 Test Function

10.310.3 Ping Test

The following introduces the purpose and procedures of the Ping test.

10.3.110.3.1 Test Purpose

The Ping test is used to check the network connectivity. The AN5006-20 transmits

the ICMP echo request message to the destination IP address, and reports whether

it has received the desired ICMP echo reply. It can be learned from the test result

whether two network devices are well connected as well as the information such as

packet loss rate and network delay.

10.3.210.3.2 Ping Test

The following introduces how to implement the Ping test.

Procedure

1. Click the NE to be configured in the Main Topology pane. Select Systemí

Policy Task Management to open the Policy Task Management tab.

2. In the left pane, select Test TaskíVOIP PING Task, and click Create to open

the Create VOIP PING Task dialog box.

3. In the Parameter Settings group box, enter the destination IP address in the

Destination IP text box, as shown in Figure 10-9.

Version: B/1 10-9

Page 358: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

Figure 10-9 Configuring the Ping Test Parameters

Note:

See Table 10-1 for Ping test parameters.

Table 10-1 Ping Test Parameters

Parameter Title

-nSelect this check box and set the quantity of Tx packets in the text box. The value ranges from 0

to 4 294 967 295 and the default value is 4.

-wSelect this check box and set the timeout interval of the waiting period in the text box. The value

ranges from 0 to 4 294 967 295 and the default value is 4000; unit: ms.

-lSelect this check box and set the size of the packet in the text box (unit: byte). The value ranges

from 0 to 65 500 and the default value is 32.

-iSelect this check box and set the TTL value in the text box. The value ranges from 1 to 255 and

the default value is 128.

-vSelect this check box and set the TOS value in the text box. The value ranges from 0 to 255 and

the default value is 0.

10-10 Version: B/1

Page 359: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

10 Test Function

Table 10-1 Ping Test Parameters (Continued)

Parameter Title

-rSelect this check box and set the hop count of the routers sending and receiving packets in the

text box. The value ranges from 1 to 9 and the default value is 1.

-s

Select this check box and set the timeslot of the route hop count in the text box. It is similar to -r,

but does not record the route via which the packet returns. The value ranges from 1 to 4, and the

default value is 1.

-tSelect this check box and the user can ping the designated computer until pressing down Ctrl + C

to terminate.

-a Select this check box to resolve the address to the host name.

-fSelect this check box to set "no-segmentation" of the data packet, so that the packet will not be

segmented by gateway of the route.

-j

Select this check box to list the route of the packet based on the designated computer in the "Host

IP" group box. Consecutive computers can be separated by intermediate gateways (loose source

route). Up to 9 host IP addresses can be configured.

-k

Select this check box to list the route of the packet based on the designated computer in the "Host

IP" group box. Consecutive computers cannot be separated by the intermediate gateway (route

strict source) Up to 9 host IP addresses can be configured.

4. Click OK and return to the VOIP PING Test window.

5. Click Execute Now and the test result will be displayed in the right pane, as

shown in Figure 10-10.

Figure 10-10 Ping Test

10.3.310.3.3 Viewing the Test Result

After the Ping test is completed, the test result will be displayed in the right pane of

the VOIP PING Task window, and you can check the following items.

Table 10-2 Ping Test Result

Item Description

Object Info The equipment to execute the Ping command.

Destination IP The IP address of the destination host

Send Message Number The number of ICMP packets transmitted by the equipment

Version: B/1 10-11

Page 360: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

Table 10-2 Ping Test Result (Continued)

Item Description

Number of Received Packets The number of ICMP packets received by the equipment

Maximum Delay The maximum interval for an ICMP packet to be transmitted and received

Minimum Delay The minimum interval for an ICMP packet to be transmitted and received

Average Delay Time The average interval for an ICMP packet to be transmitted and received

Packet Loss Rate The ratio of the lost data packets to the total number of data packets transmitted

10-12 Version: B/1

Page 361: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

Appendix A FTP Operation Guide

The following introduces the functions and procedures of the FTP operations.

A.1A.1 Function Overview

Connect the computer with the equipment using the network cable, and set up the

FTP server end on the computer; that is, install the WFTP software. During

equipment upgrade, the equipment obtains the upgrade package from the FTP

server in the FTP mode. During equipment backup, the equipment exports the

backup files to the FTP server end in the FTP mode.

A.2A.2 Procedure

The following uses an example to describe how to use the WFTP software. Create

an FTP user with the user name 1 and the password 1, and set the path for saving

the upgrade / backup package to d:\ftp.

Procedure

1. At the FTP server end, set the path for saving the upgrade / backup package to

d:\ftp.

2. Open the WFTP window, as shown in Figure A-1.

Figure A -1 Opening the WFTP Software

Version: B/1 A-1

Page 362: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

3. Click SecurityíUsers/Rights in the menu bar to start user configuration, as

shown in Figure A-2.

Figure A -2 Accessing the User Configuration GUI

4. In the User/Rights Security Dialog window that appears, click the New User

button to create a new FTP user. This user account will be used in upgrading

and backup later on. Enter the username 1, as shown in Figure A-3.

Note:

Click the Delete button to delete an existing user, or select an existing

user and click the Change Password button to modify the user’s

password.

Figure A -3 Adding New FTP User and Setting the User Name to 1

A-2 Version: B/1

Page 363: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

Appendix A FTP Operation Guide

5. Click the OK button, enter the password 1, and click OK to create a new user,

as shown in Figure A-4.

Figure A -4 Entering User Password 1

6. Enter the directory where the upgrade package / backup package is saved in

the Home Directory field in the User/Rights Security Dialog window. Type

d:\ftp according to the directory setting in Step1, as shown in Figure A-5.

Figure A -5 Enter the Directory of Upgrade Package / Backup Package

7. Click the Done button to complete the configuration.

8. Click LoggingíLog options in the No log file open window to set the log

function of the WFTP tool, as shown in Figure A-6.

Version: B/1 A-3

Page 364: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

Figure A -6 Configuring Log Function of the WFTP Tool

9. Select all the check boxes exceptWinsock Calls in the Logging Options

window, as shown in Figure A-7.

Figure A -7 Logging Options

10. Click the OK button to display the logs. Users can isolate faults using the log

information and determine whether the gets or puts operation is successful

according to the log displayed in the WFTP window.

Now the WFTP configuration is completed.

A-4 Version: B/1

Page 365: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

Product Documentation Customer Satisfaction Survey

Thank you for reading and using the product documentation provided by FiberHome. Please take a moment to

complete this survey. Your answers will help us to improve the documentation and better suit your needs. Your

responses will be confidential and given serious consideration. The personal information requested is used for

no other purposes than to respond to your feedback.

Name

Phone Number

Email Address

Company

To help us better understand your needs, please focus your answers on a single documentation or a complete

documentation set.

Documentation Name

Code and Version

Usage of the product documentation:

1. How often do you use the documentation?

° Frequently ° Rarely ° Never ° Other (please specify)

2. When do you use the documentation?

° in starting up a project ° in installing the product ° in daily maintenance ° in trouble

shooting ° Other (please specify)

3. What is the percentage of the operations on the product for which you can get instruction from the

documentation?

° 100% ° 80% ° 50% ° 0% ° Other (please specify)

4. Are you satisfied with the promptness with which we update the documentation?

° Satisfied ° Unsatisfied (your advice)

5. Which documentation form do you prefer?

° Print edition ° Electronic edition ° Other (please specify)

Quality of the product documentation:

1. Is the information organized and presented clearly?

° Very ° Somewhat ° Not at all (your advice)

2. How do you like the language style of the documentation?

° Good ° Normal ° Poor (please specify)

3. Are any contents in the documentation inconsistent with the product?

Page 366: AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device

4. Is the information complete in the documentation?

° Yes

° No (Please specify)

5. Are the product working principles and the relevant technologies covered in the documentation sufficient for

you to get known and use the product?

° Yes

° No (Please specify)

6. Can you successfully implement a task following the operation steps given in the documentation?

° Yes (Please give an example)

° No (Please specify the reason)

7. Which parts of the documentation are you satisfied with?

8. Which parts of the documentation are you unsatisfied with?Why?

9. What is your opinion on the Figures in the documentation?

° Beautiful ° Unbeautiful (your advice)

° Practical ° Unpractical (your advice)

10. What is your opinion on the layout of the documentation?

° Beautiful ° Unbeautiful (your advice)

11. Thinking of the documentations you have ever read offered by other companies, how would you compare

our documentation to them?

Product documentations from other companies:

Satisfied (please specify)

Unsatisfied (please specify)

12. Additional comments about our documentation or suggestions on how we can improve:

Thank you for your assistance. Please fax or send the completed survey to us at the contact information

included in the documentation. If you have any questions or concerns about this survey please email at

[email protected]